Auerswald COMpact 5000R Advanced Information Download

Page: 1 / 1388

V13 06/2019

COMpact 5000/R

Advanced Information

Summary of Contents for COMpact 5000R

Page 1: ...V13 06 2019 COMpact 5000 R Advanced Information ...

Page 2: ... the Chapter 45 Phone Book Authorisation 47 Exchange Line Request 49 Exchange Line Transfer 51 Analogue Connection 53 Call Waiting 54 PBX Time 55 Do not disturb Call Deblocker and Call Restrictor 56 Automatic Reception 58 Baby Call 62 Busy on Busy 63 DISA Call Through 64 Boss Secretary Function 66 CLIP Texts 67 DECT Phones 68 E mail 70 Remote Configuration and Alternative Connection Options 72 Con...

Page 3: ...on and Options 85 Distributing Firmware 87 Fixed Mobile Convergence FMC 88 Follow me 90 Activation 92 Call Charge Information 95 Call Allowance Account 96 External Outgoing Call 98 Call Data 100 Overview of Setting Options 101 Contents of the Call Data Record 103 Opening the Call Data List 104 Groups 105 GSM Gateway 108 Hardware 110 Shutting Down and Switching Off 111 Hotel Function 112 InterCom A...

Page 4: ...ions and Setting Options 147 Installing TAPI driver TSP 149 Checking the Function of the LAN TAPI 151 Loudspeaker Announcement 153 LCR 154 Macro numbers 156 MWI 157 Restart 158 Emergency Calls 160 Call Parking 164 Online Name Search 165 Multi path Call Forwarding 167 Pick up and Call Take over 168 Preliminary Pickup Query and Monitoring 169 Pick up of All Calls to Group Members 171 Private Persona...

Page 5: ...Forwarding 195 Call Forwarding Types 196 Call Forwarding for Subscribers 198 Call Forwarding for Groups 200 Call Forwarding for External Numbers 203 Call Distribution 205 Switch Input 207 Service Data 208 Setting Options 209 Recording the D Channel Protocol 210 Protection from Unauthorised Access 212 System messages 215 Subscribers 217 Announcement before Answering 219 Text Messages Instant Messag...

Page 6: ...Internal or External Phone Remote Access to Operate and Query a Voice Mailbox 243 Fax Box 246 Fax Transfer 248 Information 249 Installing Printer Driver COMpact COMmander Fax on PC 250 Configuring the Printer Driver COMpact COMmander Fax 251 Sending a fax to a recipient 253 Send a fax to multiple recipients Broadcasting file 255 VoIP 257 Note 258 Configuring External Internet Telephony 259 Configu...

Page 7: ...ng Calls 293 Initiating an Internal Call 294 Initiating an External Call 295 Initiating an External Call with Calling Line Identity Restriction 296 Initiating Private Exchange Line Access 298 Initiating Private Exchange Line Access without a PIN 299 Initiating Targeted Exchange Line Access 300 Force Public Exchange Call for Automatic Exchange Line Request 301 Initiating Targeted VoIP Access 302 In...

Page 8: ... Partners 328 Initiating Query Call to Third Subscriber 329 Transferring 332 Transferring with Announcement 333 Blind Transfer Transferring without Announcement 335 Placing Communication Partner in Waiting Loop 337 Calling a Third Subscriber and Transferring to an Active Communication Partner 339 Parking the Call Internally Call Parking 341 Unparking the Call Call Parking 342 Conference Calls 343 ...

Page 9: ...sing 364 Hook Flash Timing 365 Follow me 366 Call Deblocker Incoming 370 Call Allowance Account 371 Outgoing Calls 372 Call Data Single Call Record 374 Targeted Exchange Line Access 375 Targeted VoIP Access 376 Groups 377 Hotel Functions 380 Identification IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Gateway DHCP Client 381 InterCom Announcement Handsfree Speaking 384 Conference 385 Configuration Switchover 387 Louds...

Page 10: ...Call Forwarding for Subscribers 420 Call Restrictor Incoming 423 Announcement before Answering 424 Door Functions 425 Voice Mailbox 427 Music on Hold and Announcement 438 Wake up Functions 440 Assistant de configuration 443 Basic Knowledge 444 Langue 445 Configuration réseau 446 Configuration Ethernet 447 Configuration DNS 448 Dealer and operator data 449 Accès administrateur 450 Données du systèm...

Page 11: ...as an Administrator 482 Opening the Configuration Manager as Sub Administrator 483 Opening the Configuration Manager as User 484 Operating Instructions for the Configuration Manager 485 Configuration Manager Navigation 486 Logging Out 487 Entry and Selection Fields 488 Creating Deleting Searching for and Sorting Table Entries 489 Information on the PBX 491 Synthèses 492 Plan de répartition des num...

Page 12: ... IP 516 Messages système 517 Flux de données réseau 518 Messages d état 520 Settings Configuration Manager 521 Matériel 522 Sélection des modules 523 Settings of the Modules 524 Configuration du port 525 Settings of the Ports 526 2BRI 527 2FXO 529 Réseaux publics 530 Indicatif 531 Settings of the Exchange Line Request 532 Exchange Line Request Exchange Line Access Number 533 Prefixes 536 Signallin...

Page 13: ...eral Info 554 Line Connection 556 Start of Call Outgoing Calls 558 End of the Call 560 Clip 562 Feature Codes 564 Tones 566 Ring Signal 568 RNIS 570 Settings of the PTMP Connection 571 Network Provider 572 Miscellaneous 573 Multiple Subscriber Numbers 575 Expert Configuration of the PTMP Connection 577 Liasion Point Multi Point PMP 578 General Info 580 Routage 583 Transfert d appel 585 Présentatio...

Page 14: ...Settings of the VoIP Provider 627 SIP 628 RTP 636 Settings 641 Number Presentation outgoing 645 Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages 650 Management VoIP Account 653 Settings for the VoIP Accounts 654 Network Provider 655 Location Access Data 656 Miscellaneous 659 Phone Numbers for PTP Connection 660 Phone Numbers for PTMP connection 663 Expert Settings of the PTMP Connection 666 VoIP Account 667 Ge...

Page 15: ...ion 692 Call Distribution for 693 Modem Fax Call Distribution 695 Transfert d appel 698 Settings for the Call Forwarding 699 Call Forwarding for 700 Abonnés Abo 702 Numéros de téléphone 703 Management Subscriber 704 Provisioning d IP 710 Settings 711 File Management 713 Profils 717 Management Profile 718 Settings of the Subscriber Profiles 719 Exchange Line Settings 720 Reachability 727 Authorisat...

Page 16: ...Key for PBX Functions 745 Copying a Function Key Assignment into Other COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets 748 Restoring a Phone Book from the PBX 750 Propriétés Synthèse des fonctions 752 Settings of the Subscriber Properties 753 Basic Settings 754 Exchange Line Settings 760 Reachability 767 Authorisations 771 Analogue Settings 775 VoIP Settings 778 Voicemail Fax Box 782 Settings 785 Téléphones non ...

Page 17: ... Settings 827 Exchange Line Settings 834 Reachability 840 Voicemail Fax Box 847 Settings 850 Périphériques 853 Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie 854 Management Voice mail and fax boxes 855 Management Profile 862 Settings Profile Assignment 863 Settings Voice of the Mail Fax Function 864 System Information 865 Automatic Clean Up 866 Memory 867 Channels Simultaneously for Outgoing Calls 869 Lang...

Page 18: ...inals 906 Configuring VoIP Door Terminal 908 Configurig IP Switch Relays 910 Configuring Loudspeaker Announcements 912 Online Configuration 914 Interphones 915 Management of the Door Terminal 916 Door Calls Relays 917 Settings of the Door Terminal 918 Configuration of the Door Terminal 919 Settings Door Call 920 Interfaces de paging 924 Management Announcement Output 925 Settings Announcement Outp...

Page 19: ...est 959 Action URLs Incoming 960 Action URLs Outgoing 962 Event Type 963 Settings Action URL HTTP Request 966 Calendriers 967 Configurations 968 Management Configuration 969 Plages horaires 971 Management Switching Times 972 Routage 974 Soft LCR 4 0 975 Management LCR Subscribers 976 Management LCR Providers 977 Management Networks and LCR import 978 Management Area Codes Area Code Ranges 980 Mana...

Page 20: ... Settings for Call Through 1000 Exchange Line Settings 1001 Call Assignment 1003 Call Through User 1004 Textes CLIP 1006 Settings CLIP Texts 1007 Short Code Macros 1009 Management Macro Short Code Number 1010 Crédits de communication 1012 Settings of the Call Allowance Account 1013 Charges 1014 Account Debit 1016 Call Allowance Accounts 1017 Fonction Hôtel 1019 Settings of the Hotel Function 1020 ...

Page 21: ...e Name Search Group Filters 1046 Settings Online Name Search Text Converter 1048 File d attente 1050 Settings Waiting Field 1051 Music on Hold and Announcements 1052 Management of the Music On Hold and Announcements 1053 Own Files 1054 Systemdateien 1055 Settings for Music On Hold and Announcements 1056 Source for Music on Hold 1057 Music on Hold with Announcement 1058 Music on Hold during the Rin...

Page 22: ... Management 1089 SFTP Transfer 1091 Carnets d adresses 1093 Management Contacts and assignment 1094 Contacts 1095 Contact Groups and Assignment 1100 Google Contact Groups 1103 CSV Import Group 1106 Settings of the Contacts 1108 Settings of the Contact Groups 1110 Settings of the Contact Group Authorisations 1115 Authorisations 1116 Contact Group Filter 1117 Settings Standard Contact Groups 1118 In...

Page 23: ... 1142 Management of the PBX Dealer and Operator Data 1143 PBX Data 1144 Administrator Access 1145 Dealer Data 1147 Activation 1148 Management Activation 1149 Droits d accès 1151 Configuring Access Authorisation 1152 Sauvegarde de données 1153 Management of the Configuration Data 1154 Store Configuration Data in the PBX 1155 Read Configuration Data from the PBX 1156 Regenerate Configuration 1159 Re...

Page 24: ...tion of the PBX Time Date 1177 Automatic Distribution of the PBX Time Date 1179 Configuration IP 1180 Settings of the IP Configuration 1181 Server Configuration 1182 Ethernet Configuration 1185 COMpact 4DSP 1188 DNS Configuration 1189 HTTP Proxy Configuration 1191 SFTP Server 1193 Configuration VoIP 1195 Settings for VoIP 1196 Distribution of the VoIP Channels 1197 SIP 1198 RTP 1199 Quality of Ser...

Page 25: ...ngs of the IP Black and Whitelist 1217 IP Black and Whitelist 1218 Certificats 1221 Management of the Certificates 1222 Information 1223 Not trustworthy 1224 Trustworthy 1225 Certificate Authorities 1226 Webserver 1228 SIPS SRTP internal VoIP 1229 View 1231 Courrier électronique 1233 Settings Outgoing Mail Server 1234 Management Logo 1238 Management Internationalisation 1239 Settings International...

Page 26: ... Buttons 1261 Information 1262 Performing a Restart Immediately by Pressing a Button 1263 Restoring Firmware at the Touch of a Button 1265 Restore Factory Settings at the Touch of a Button 1267 Printers and Data Storage Devices at the USB Host 1269 Glossary 1270 Terminology 1271 A 1272 Account 1273 Exchange Line 1274 APIPA 1275 Auerswald Remote Access Server 1276 Remote Extension 1277 B 1278 B Cha...

Page 27: ...I 1287 DECT 1288 DHCP 1289 DiffServ 1290 D Channel 1291 DNS 1292 Domain 1293 DSL 1294 DynDNS 1295 E 1296 Echo Cancellation 1297 End Device 1298 Ethernet 1299 F 1300 Firewall 1301 Firmware 1302 Flash 1303 G 1304 GAP 1305 Gateway 1306 H 1307 Host 1308 HTTP Proxy 1309 HTTPS 1310 Hyperlink 1311 I 1312 IAD 1313 ...

Page 28: ...v4 Address 1315 IPv6 Address 1316 ISDN 1317 PD 1318 J 1319 Jitter Buffer 1320 L 1321 LAN 1322 LDAP 1323 LED 1324 M 1325 MAC Address 1326 PTMP 1327 DTMF 1328 MSN 1329 N 1330 NAT 1331 Extension 1332 Network 1333 NTP 1334 O 1335 Outbound Proxy 1336 P 1337 PIN 1338 PoE 1339 Port 1340 Proxy Server 1341 Q 1342 ...

Page 29: ...8 RSS Feed 1349 S 1350 S0 Basic Access 1351 S0 Port 1352 S2M Primary Rate Multiplex Access 1353 SD SDHC SD XC Card 1354 Server 1355 SIP 1356 SIP DDI SIP Trunking 1357 SIP Port 1358 SMTP 1359 Soft Call 1360 Structured Cabling 1361 STUN 1362 Subnet mask 1363 Switch 1364 Syslog Server 1365 System Phone 1366 T 1367 TAPI 1368 TCP 1369 Template 1370 PTP 1371 ...

Page 30: ...V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 30 T Net Functions 1372 Driver 1373 U 1374 UDP 1375 UP0 1376 UPnP 1377 URL 1378 V 1379 Public Exchange 1380 VoIP Account 1381 VoIP Provider 1382 Voucher 1383 VPN 1384 W 1385 WAN 1386 Z 1387 Certificate 1388 ...

Page 31: ...r processing and spread of the content even in parts is only permitted with our explicit permission Infringements will lead to claims for damages All rights reserved Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation registered in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks mentioned are the property of the corresponding manufacturer Current Issues After a firmware...

Page 32: ... Deblocker and Call Restrictor Exchange Line Request Exchange Line Transfer Analogue Connection Call Waiting PBX Time Do not disturb Call Deblocker and Call Restrictor Automatic Reception Baby Call Busy on Busy DISA Call Through Boss Secretary Function CLIP Texts DECT Phones E mail Remote Configuration and Alternative Connection Options Firmware Update Fixed Mobile Convergence FMC Follow me Activa...

Page 33: ... Gateway Hardware Shutting Down and Switching Off Hotel Function InterCom Announcement Hands Free Internal Phone Numbers ISDN Connection Calendar Ringing Sequence Ringtones Backing Up and Recovering Configuration Data Configuration Switchover LAN TAPI Loudspeaker Announcement LCR Macro numbers MWI Restart Emergency Calls Call Parking Online Name Search Multi path Call Forwarding ...

Page 34: ... Project Assignment Provisioning for IP Phones Relays Actuators Call Channel Reservation Phone Number Display CLIP Number Presentation Call Forwarding Call Distribution Switch Input Service Data Protection from Unauthorised Access System messages Subscribers Announcement before Answering Text Messages Instant Messaging Tones Door Functions Transmission of the Display Name Sub System Operation Tran...

Page 35: ...g OffHotel FunctionInterCom Announcement Hands FreeInternal Phone NumbersISDN ConnectionCalendarRinging SequenceRingtonesBacking Up and Recovering Configuration DataConfiguration SwitchoverLAN TAPILoudspeaker AnnouncementLCRMacro numbersMWIRestartEmergency CallsCall ParkingOnline Name SearchMulti path Call ForwardingPick up and Call Take overPreliminary Pickup Query and MonitoringPick up of All Ca...

Page 36: ...nizes Note A maximum of 32 Action URLs can be configured The sequence can be as follows Alarm detection via a switch input or a call to the alarm phone number The set alarm delay time is running 0 99 seconds The first alarm call run starts with the call of the first alarm subscriber At the same time the Action URL is sent Alarm type start If an alarm subscriber acknowledges the alarm the alarm wil...

Page 37: ...Action URL HTTP Request COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 37 Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques URL d action ...

Page 38: ...s are connected to the PBX or large volumes of contact details are to be uploaded it may in certain cases take several hours before the contact data is available to all the phones after the PBX has been commissioned Proceed as follows for configuration Create and assign contacts Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Contacts et affectation Create contact ...

Page 39: ...Address Books COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 39 Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Groupes de contacts par défaut ...

Page 40: ...called with a special ringtone phone dependent After picking up the receiver you repeatedly hear an alarm announcement stored in the PBX The called party must acknowledge the alarm call within 60 seconds by sending the DTMF number 0 If the called party does not acknowledge the alarm call the next alarm subscriber is called a few seconds after the first call is finished And so on If all the alarm s...

Page 41: ...switch input and assigning it to the alarm Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Alarmes Creating a relais and assigning it to the alarm Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Alarmes Managing and assigning audio files for announcements Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Gestion des fichiers Fonctions Musique d ...

Page 42: ...Mpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 42 Activating alarms Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Alarmes Using a character string on the internal or external phone see Alarm ...

Page 43: ...tion Manager on the following pages For admin Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres For user Propriétés de l abonné Paramètres Note It makes sense to use the alarm device function in combination with special calling systems such as the GIRA calling system 834 plus for example Combined with the transmission of the display name text messages can be sent and signallised accordingly If necessary switching...

Page 44: ... Call Restrictor COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 44 Exchange Line Authorisation Call Deblocker and Call Restrictor Information on the Chapter Phone Book Authorisation Information on the ChapterPhone Book Authorisation ...

Page 45: ...be put in call restrictors restricted numbers There are several ways to do this In general phone numbers are restricted that begin with a certain digit sequence and that should not be accessible to every subscriber due to its higher charge tariffs e g 0900 phone numbers Normally the first 4 to 5 digits indicate the phone service that cause such high charges If an attempt is made to dial a restrict...

Page 46: ... For the exchange line transfer function Fonctions Prise de la ligne principale For the Call Through function Fonctions DISA Call Through Configuring the exchange line authorisation call deblocker and restrictor outgoing configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscribers Abonnés Abo Profils Paramètres de ligne For groups Groupes Profils Paramètres de lig...

Page 47: ...ks Important The phone book authorisation only becomes effective if no corresponding exchange line authorisation is present on any of the external connections Important If only the Internes uniquement pas d appel d urgence exchange line authorisation is present you cannot make an external call even if you have phone book authorisation Proceed as follows for configuration Switching the phone book a...

Page 48: ...ndent Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscribers Abonnés Abo Profils Paramètres de ligne For groups Groupes Profils Paramètres de ligne Creating contacts and assiging the contacts to the Annuaire version 1 contact group Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Contacts et affectation ...

Page 49: ...he dialled phone number and the internal numbering plan If the phone number is contained in the phone numbering list the PBX establishes an internal connection If the phone number is not contained in the phone numbering list the PBX establishes an external connection Note The short code number is a part of the internal numbering plan and is therefore an internal number However it leads to an exter...

Page 50: ...est type can be set separately for each subscriber In this case the automatic exchange line request can only be selected for IP DECT phones COMfortel 1200 IP and COMfortel C 400 For all other subscribers only direct exchange line phone and internal phone can be selected Proceed as follows for configuration Making settings for exchange line request Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publi...

Page 51: ...est exchange line access After the function key assigned to exchange line transfer has been pressed on the system phone authorised for making exchanges a confirmation tone is issued to both internal subscribers and the internal call must be ended The requesting phone now has access to the exchange line settings configured for this purpose These exchange line settings remain until the first success...

Page 52: ...t minimum configuring a business exchange line authorisation for incoming calls for the requesting phone Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres de ligne Configuring a function key for the exchange line transfer on the system phone optional see the phone manual ...

Page 53: ...structions Proceed as follows for configuration Configuring the analogue connection and entering the phone number Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Analogique Creating a call distribution for the analogue connection Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels If necessary making country specific modifications Using the Configuration Manager page ...

Page 54: ... follows for configuration Switching call waiting function on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Disponibilité Using a character string on the internal phone see Call Waiting Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Note As of firmware 6 6 PBX and 2 4 VoIP phone a comparison between phone and PBX will be implemented This function can then...

Page 55: ...configurations as well as wake ups During a power failure or PBX reset the PBX time is lost There are several ways to update it Manually Take from PC Via the network Using the buffered real time clock saves the time for approx two hours in the case of a power outage Via ISDN external S0 port optional see Technical Data in Manual Note The switch to from daylight savings is done automatically for th...

Page 56: ...can be assigned a call deblocker for incoming calls in the PBX VIP numbers The call deblocker which applies to all subscribers can be enabled on your own phone as needed If there are certain persons who you absolutely do not want to call you or if you do not want callers to call an extension their external numbers and or all anonymous callers can be assigned to a call restrictor for incoming calls...

Page 57: ...tor Incoming Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Note As of firmware 6 6 PBX and 2 4 VoIP phone a comparison between phone and PBX will be implemented This function can then be switched on or off in the phone or the PBX Configuring the call deblocker and restrictor incoming configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For su...

Page 58: ...sult several automatic receptions can be operated in parallel for example in multi company operation or if required one main reception with a number of sub receptions can be set up Calls are accepted in the automatic reception in the following way A caller reaches the automatic reception e g via the external call distribution function The caller hears a greeting which might also be repeated They t...

Page 59: ...r that is transferred not the reception s number Note If the call is not answered within 120 seconds the announcement if the destination is busy does not reply is played In this case the call is then either ended the default destination is called or the caller is reconnected to the automatic reception they previously called depending on the setting for the system Reaction if the destination is bus...

Page 60: ...set for the default destination number Note The exchange line authorisations call restrictors call deblockers and do not disturb settings that apply to in house call destinations are taken into account when the call is transferred Proceed as follows to set up automatic reception Manage and assign audio files for announcements Using the Configuration Manager on the pages that follow Fonctions Music...

Page 61: ...V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 61 Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Standard automatiques SVI Setting up call distribution for automatic receptions Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels ...

Page 62: ...the keys are pressed often there is approx a half second delay Note The baby call function is not available for VoIP phones Proceed as follows for configuration Switching the baby call function on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres Using a character string on the internal phone see Baby Call Hotline Configuring the baby call function configuration dependent Usin...

Page 63: ...ngs CFU and multi path call forwardings are still possible The maximum number of connections can also be configured dynamically This ensures that the number of maximum connections is automatically adjusted to the number of registered group members so that the call is not put on hold Proceed as follows for configuration Assigning a maximum number of connections to a group or switching Busy on Busy ...

Page 64: ...red as Call Through subscriber The transmitted subscriber number must not be in the MSN blacklist Configured 6 digit Call Through PIN Procedure Dialling the predefined external number of the PBX for Call Through The PBX accepts the call and signals this with a special tone Enter the 6 digit PIN and The exchange line dial tone is heard Based on the transmitted phone number and PIN the PBX checks if...

Page 65: ...ng a contact for the Call Through user Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Contacts et affectation Making settings for Call Through Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions DISA Call Through If necessary configuring LCR Using the Configuration Manager page Routage Soft LCR 4 0 ...

Page 66: ...important calls to the boss phone Requirements At least two System phones which support function keys for the boss secretary function optional see the phone manual Note The boss secretary function is configured on the system phones in question The configuration and operation of the function is described in detail in the manual for the system phone Proceed as follows for configuration Configure a f...

Page 67: ...CLIP texts are displayed on the system phones and or the CLIP capable analogue phones for specific calls e g for wake up calls Proceed as follows for configuration Enter CLIP texts for specific calls e g wake up calls and functions Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Textes CLIP ...

Page 68: ... If a COMfortel DECT 900 Base is on the internal S0 port no further end devices can be run on this port due to output limitations Note A maximum of five internal numbers can be allocated to mobile handsets of a COMfortel DECT 900 Base three are recommended The following chapters describe how you can make further settings for the COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets COMfortel DECT IP1040 Base with COMf...

Page 69: ...s Books COMfortel WS 400 IP or COMfortel WS 650 IP with COMfortel M 100 200 210 300 310 The IP DECT server is connected to and operated on the PBX via the Ethernet port and internal VoIP channels optional see Technical Data in the Instructions In connection with a COMfortel WS 400 IP or COMfortel WS 650 IP the handsets are operated on the PBX as IP DECT phones You find the description for how to c...

Page 70: ...server to be used from your Internet service provider for example The PBX supports a large number of logos limited by the total memory available These logos can be freely assigned to the individual e mail functions of the PBX system e mails forwarding of voicemail and fax messages For the e mails to be sent by the PBX several language files are included in the scope of supply The PBX supports addi...

Page 71: ...ice mail fax box Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Propriétés Paramètres de boîte Assigning a logo to the system e mails Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Messages système Managing language files Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Courrier électronique Internationalisation Assigning a language file to a voice...

Page 72: ...iguration via the Internet as well as configuring alternative connection options under certain conditions The connected system phones can also be configured over the PBX under certain conditions You can use the following connection options to configure either remotely or directly the PBX and the ISDN system phones connected to it Configuring the PBX via the In house Network The PBX is usually conf...

Page 73: ...tel Set configuration software on the PC you are going to use Configuring internal ISDN System Phones Remotely via a PBX s External S0 Port You can remotely configure the ISDN system phone indirectly via an external ISDN connection using the PBX and a device which is connected to both the external S0 port on the PBX and to the PC for example ISDN PC controller The PBX must be configured accordingl...

Page 74: ...The PBX is usually configured via an internal network connection Your PC must be connected to the same network as the PBX Remote configuration of the PBX via the Internet with Auerswald Remote Access Server Remote configuration of the PBX can be accessed via the page https remote access auerswald de on the Internet This requires a dealer access via the Internet and enabling of the Auerswald Remote...

Page 75: ...you are going to use Remote configuration of internal ISDN system phones via an external S0 port of the PBX You can remotely configure the ISDN system phone indirectly via an external ISDN connection using the PBX and a device which is connected to both the external S0 port on the PBX and to the PC for example ISDN PC controller The PBX must be configured accordingly Before you can do this you mus...

Page 76: ...nistration Configuration à distance Computer with existing connection to the Internet DSL DTMF capable phone or DTMF dialler Access data for registration at protected Auerswald services Knowledge of the serial number of the PBX Knowledge of user name and password for the Configuration Manager 1 Start a browser 2 In the browser s address field enter https remote access auerswald de 3 Enter the requ...

Page 77: ...F 8 PIN ARA 91 You will hear the external confirmation tone 1 second In the user interface of the Auerswald Remote Access Server within a few seconds the connection symbol appears in the line of the called and released PBX 7 Click The login window of the Configuration Manager opens 8 Log in to the Configuration Manager 9 Make the desired changes 10 Log out from the Configuration Manager 11 Click i...

Page 78: ...e operating manual of your router Note The access is possible via http and via https encrypted access If the option Forcer la connexion HTTPS has been enabled only the https connection can be used In this case a port you selected yourself must be rerouted to port 443 of the PBX access with https mein dyndns org Port for example Important An internal network is usually protected from actions from t...

Page 79: ...ald Remote Access Server COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 79 The login window opens 3 Enter your user name and password 4 Click Ok this text is depending on the browser used The Configuration Manager opens 5 Make the desired changes ...

Page 80: ...tel Set configuration software version 3 0 or later Knowledge of the user sub admin or admin PIN 1 Start COMfortel Set 2 Click Options Interface 3 Select Interface IP network enter the IP address of the PBX and under IP port Default 7002 the configuration port for system phones on the PBX 4 Click OK 5 Open the menu File Open Telephone 6 Double click on the PBX symbol displays all connected system ...

Page 81: ...formation V13 06 2019 81 9 Make the desired changes 10 Open the menu File Save File 11 Select a memory location in the directory 12 Enter a name for the cf2 file and click Save 13 Open the menu File Save Telephone 14 Select the desired phone and click OK 15 Enter the associated PIN and click OK ...

Page 82: ...ne number transmitted does not correspond with the configured phone numbers the PBX must be enabled via an internal phone using a digit sequence for remote configuration An existing external ISDN connection between the PC and the PBX including the drivers Installed COMfortel Set configuration software version 3 0 or later Knowledge of the user sub admin or admin PIN Activation of the PBX immediate...

Page 83: ...nd exchange line access number and click OK 7 Double click the PBX symbol to display all connected system phones Select the desired phone and click OK 8 Select the desired Authorisation level 9 Enter the associated PIN and click OK 10 Make your changes 11 Open File Save File 12 Select a memory location in the directory 13 Enter a name for the cf2 file and click Save 14 Open File Save Telephone 15 ...

Page 84: ...Firmware Update COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 84 Firmware Update Information and Options Distributing Firmware Information and OptionsDistributing Firmware ...

Page 85: ...e of the functional upgrades provided as part of a firmware update require additional configuration parameters Sometimes not all these parameters can be determined automatically from the previous firmware version This is why you need to edit some parts of the configuration manually in this update type Note If the regular firmware update option has been enabled the status messages tell you whether ...

Page 86: ...f the PBX via update server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Mise à jour et redémarrage du firmware Firmware update for system phones Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Mise à jour et redémarrage du firmware Restoring the firmware of the PBX Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Mise à jour et redémarrage du firmware By pressing a button on the PBX...

Page 87: ... phone Under Administration Mise à jour et redémarrage du firmware you can see under Mise à jour du firmware pour téléphones dédiés VoIP the current status Note The PBX must have a firmware version as of 6 6 Note The phone that receives the firmware must have a firmware version as of 2 4 Note Distributing the firmware is possible from one COMfortel 3600 IP to other COMfortel 3600 IP and from COMfo...

Page 88: ...der which the caller can be called back and not the Call Through MSN An FCM call is shown as such in the Liste des appels under Type d appel Requirements Provider supporting CLIP no screening possibly with costs CLIP no screening configured at the provider Procedure for outgoing calls Dialling the Call Through MSN of the PBX Dialling the 6 digit PIN user PIN of the FMC using subscriber This is una...

Page 89: ...g the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Paramètres expert of the corresponding Account connection Configurer Transfert d appel Utiliser identité en départ en cas de transfert d appel Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Paramètres expert of the corresponding Account connection Configurer Présentation du numéro de téléphone Identité en départ Making settings for FMC Using t...

Page 90: ...are But you can also take the calls of several subscribers groups at your phone Configure Follow me from any available internal phone If you have already left your desk you can forward your calls to another phone This way it is possible to forward the calls to your mobile phone or forward it to an internal representative Configure Follow me from external If you have already left the desk you can f...

Page 91: ...cient exchange line authorisations for the involved internal subscribers Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres de ligne Note The destination subscriber needs a sufficient exchange line authorisation for taking external calls Switching Follow me on Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscribers Abonnés Abo Propriétés Disponibilité For groups ...

Page 92: ...e mail channel for voice mail functions with one voice mailbox 10 configurations 18000 call data records Project related calls project numbers Call Through calls Call Through for all lines LAN TAPI for 4 subscribers LCR for all subscribers Important Operating the PBX without system release is not possible Important It is not possible to use the voice mail channel without inserted USB memory stick ...

Page 93: ...sources against a fee System activation Automatic receptions Auerswald hotel function for all subscribers LAN TAPI for all subscribers 8 additional VoIP channels for the COMpact 4DSP module 20 additional voice mailboxes and 20 additional fax boxes for the COMpact 4DSP module SIP convenience package brand plus e g BLF MWI for VoIP end devices Support PBX Call Assist Phonebook Gigaset Important The ...

Page 94: ...d fax boxes requires a COMpact 4DSP module Important The Phonebook Gigaset is available only in connection with a COMfortel DECT IP1040 Base Note The PBX dongle required for the extension is part of the basic device Proceed as follows for configuration Release other functions Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Release ...

Page 95: ...ssary The deletion has no influence on the call charges recorded in the call data memory of the PBX To check the charges during a call or directly afterwards the charges are transmitted to ISDN phones unchanged at the moment they are accrued even if the receiver is on hook Proceed as follows for configuration Switching charge information at the external connection on Using the Configuration Manage...

Page 96: ...vider type is used by manual selection for making calls a configured call allowance account will not apply to the call in question To avoid this the provider phone numbers in question should be entered as restricted numbers and this function should be enabled for every phone Note If the LCR procedure Soft LCR 4 0 is used the charges are calculated based on the length of the call and the tariff tab...

Page 97: ...ccount COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 97 Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Crédits de communication Using a character string on the internal phone see Call Allowance Account ...

Page 98: ...ntly valid configuration the system checks whether a preferred exchange line has been configured If no preferred exchange line has been configured or the preferred exchange line is a land line connection the system checks the phone number on the basis of the LCR networks if LCR is configured and enabled and then dials it on a land line connection Note The VoIP GSM routing is performed depending on...

Page 99: ...d VoIP access point Note When you dial one of the local numbers phone number without a prefix listed in the exception number table over a VoIP access point the PBX automatically converts the phone number as specified under Présentation du numéro de téléphone appels sortants for the VoIP provider Note For all DSL connections that are not made over a dedicated line some VoIP provider reset the DSL l...

Page 100: ...ware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 100 Call Data Overview of Setting Options Contents of the Call Data Record Opening the Call Data List Overview of Setting OptionsContents of the Call Data RecordOpening the Call Data List ...

Page 101: ...d appel Paramètres Currency name and set the cost per call unit Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Crédits de communication Set billing factor Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres Configure the columns of the call data list Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Données d appel Options d impression Configure filter Using the Conf...

Page 102: ...Overview of Setting Options COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 102 Using a character string on the internal phone see Call Data Single Call Record ...

Page 103: ... the call Time at the beginning of the call Duration of the call Prefix number of the LCR provider if used Number of the external call partner if known Name of the external call partner if known Number of the internal phone billing real Name of the internal phone billing real Your own external number Call charges Billing factor Call direction Billing type Call type Project number Billing number fo...

Page 104: ...list shows the call data records recorded in the call data memory Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager As admin Données des utilisateurs Données d appel Liste des appels As user Liste des appels Note Sorting criteria max 3 and sequence can be changed via the column headlines Main sorting criteria is the last one selected ...

Page 105: ...r of these two groups he will only be considered as a member of the main group when a call comes in Note Subgroups i e groups that have been configured as members of other groups are permanently logged in as incoming and permanently logged out as outgoing Note Phones permanently logged in cannot log out of a group Note Group calls can also be placed in the waiting loop always provided that at leas...

Page 106: ...ed into last Incoming and outgoing When logging into a group as incoming and outgoing the subscriber then finds himself in the call distribution of the group in question for internal exchange line and door calls and also acquires a number of additional characteristics access rights from the group These replace his own characteristics permissions as an individual subscriber for outgoing work relate...

Page 107: ...6 2019 107 Groupes Propriétés Logging Subscribers in out Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Paramètres de base Using a character string on the internal phone see Groups Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual ...

Page 108: ... a GSM gateway Note If the PBX has no connection to the fixed network outgoing external calls can only be initiated via a targeted exchange line access using the phone numbers and the corresponding configured access entered on the page Routage VoIP GSM routing Numéros de téléphone d exception or via a configured preferred exchange line Exchange line settings for subscribers or groups Proceed as fo...

Page 109: ...teway COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 109 Entering the connection type on the ISDN connection and the phone number In the GSM gateway configuration see manual of the GSM gateway ...

Page 110: ...on is the basic set up for the inserted modules The connection assignments for the ports must be set depending on the proper use and must be adapted to the actual connection options on site Note Please find the basic information for the use of the modules in the Installation and Commissioning Instructions Proceed as follows for configuration Selecting modules Using the Configuration Manager page M...

Page 111: ...ws for powering down and switching off the PBX Important When shutting down the PBX all of the connections to the web server all calls and all data services are terminated Unsaved data is lost Immediate powering down Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Mise à jour et redémarrage du firmware Note The PBX is powered down immediately All connected calls will be disconnected Delayed po...

Page 112: ...cleaned unclean blocked can be checked and changed As soon as check in is complete the following configuration and query functions can be used Call charge queries including check in date Interim call charge calculation printout Wake up time configuration External access block Check out Hotel room phones When used as a hotel room phone the programming and transferring functions as well as spezific ...

Page 113: ... the caller call redial list as well as of the phone book parts of the phone book can be blocked in the phone Scheduled call reminders and power dialling Call charge query and wake up time configuration using a function key Print function Via the hotel reception phone the incurred call costs of a guest can be printed out as an invoice or interim bill with itemized bill of identification Requiremen...

Page 114: ...e hotel reception phones can be grouped together and one or more call channels can be reserved for them Alternatively exchange line authorisations for only a part of the available external ports can be assigned to the hotel room phones Configuring the printing function Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Fonction Hôtel Créer formulaire d impression Configuring a hotel room function key ...

Page 115: ...ee the phone s manual Note The value configured in the system phone for cost per call unit optional see the phone s manual should match that in the Configuration Manager Configuring the SFTP transfer and switch on the SFTP server if an evaluation programme shall have access to the provided data e g call data list Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration IP Serveur SFTP ...

Page 116: ...oup is called using the InterCom function Note If a group is called using the InterCom function all system phones of the group that have given the InterCom permission and are ready to take calls will be called The group status logged in logged out will not be taken into account Hands free calling is not possible in the case of an InterCom call to a group After a few rings the system phone system p...

Page 117: ...at supports InterCom optional see the phone manual Proceed as follows for configuration Switching the InterCom permission for the involved internal phones on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres If necessary assigning a function key for InterCom on the system phone optional see the phone manual ...

Page 118: ... a good idea to create a phone numbering plan for the internal numbers before allocation and then use the following steps to transmit this to the PBX Proceed as follows for configuration Create internal phone numbers for subscribers Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Create internal phone numbers for groups Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Numéros de ...

Page 119: ...ion Manager page Périphériques Alarmes Create internal phone numbers for automatic receptions Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Standard automatiques SVI Create internal numbers for short code dialling numbers as part of contacts Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Contacts et affectation ...

Page 120: ...onfiguration Manager on the following pages Réseaux publics RNIS Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Réseaux publics RNIS Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Configurer Configuring the PTP connection and entering phone numbers Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Co...

Page 121: ...ISDN Connection COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 121 Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics RNIS Additional PBX base numbers ...

Page 122: ...e g vacation times are managed in the PBX calendar These days are taken into account by the PBX during automatic configuration switchovers and if desired during Least Cost Routing LCR and when executing wake up calls Proceed as follows for configuration Creating holidays Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Calendrier ...

Page 123: ...Ringing Sequence COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 123 Ringing Sequence Explanations of the Ringing Sequence Examples Explanations of the Ringing SequenceExamples ...

Page 124: ...pplied to all logged in phones when they are busy The call is ended by the network provider after approx 2 minutes In the case of call forwarding on no reply the group call is forwarded to the destination already after the configured delay time linéaire All phones logged into a group ring directly one after the other Only one phone rings at a time Busy subscribers are skipped In the case of call f...

Page 125: ... balancing The order of the called phones depends on a dynamic priority list After each call the phone involved is placed last rotating After the first loop another one starts In the second loop call waiting is applied to the busy subscribers The call is ended by the network provider after approx 2 minutes without rotating After the first loop the call is disconnected Split Group During the ringin...

Page 126: ... 2019 126 Configuring ringing sequence priority and ringing delay for the existing groups Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Paramètres de base If necessary configuring rework time for the existing groups Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Disponibilité ...

Page 127: ...ble options The following parameters are common to all examples Number of phones logged in 4 Configured time 20 seconds Priority order T1 T2 T3 T4 Ringing delay for ringing sequence Tous enabled for T3 CF delay time for CF on no Reply 20 seconds All like Tous groupe fractionné but a second caller hears the busy signal All Split Group ...

Page 128: ...Examples COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 128 Linear fixed Split Group ...

Page 129: ...Examples COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 129 Linear balancing Split Group This is different than Linéaire fixe groupe fractionné due to the changing priorities only ...

Page 130: ...Examples COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 130 Linear fixed rotating Split Group Linear balancing rotating Split Group ...

Page 131: ...Examples COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 131 This is different than Linéaire fixe rotatif groupe fractionné due to the changing priorities only Adding fixed Split Group ...

Page 132: ...t 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 132 Adding balancing Split Group This is different than Structurant fixe groupe fractionné due to the changing priorities only Adding fixed rotating Split Group ...

Page 133: ...s COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 133 Adding balancing rotating Split Group This is different than Structurant fixe rotatif groupe fractionné due to the changing priorities only ...

Page 134: ... more information refer to the description of your end device Note On some system phones the ringtones can be configured based on the call type or the phone numbers optional see phone manual Ringtones are displayed on analogue phones as follows 1 x plus long 1 long tone 1 second 4 second pause 3 x plus court 3 double tones approx 1 second pause 1 Tonalité spéciale Uninterrupted pulsing 2 Tonalité ...

Page 135: ...x publics RNIS Numéros Directs SDA en PTP Réseaux publics RNIS Additional PBX base numbers Réseaux publics Analogique Réseaux publics VoIP Comptes Configuring the ringing tone for internal calls Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres analogiques Configuring the ringing tone for door calls Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Interphones Configuring the...

Page 136: ...king Up and Recovering Configuration Data Information on the Chapter Saving the Configuration for Automatic Upload onto a USB Memory Stick Uploading the Configuration Automatically Information on the ChapterSaving the Configuration for Automatic Upload onto a USB Memory StickUploading the Configuration Automatically ...

Page 137: ... the music on hold and all annoucements saved in the PBX When the configuration file is created there is the option of saving the configuration data without any network settings PBX data or music on hold announcements so that the configuration file can also be saved in other PBXs The network settings include the following data Ethernet configuration DHCP client setting IP address Sub network mask ...

Page 138: ...n Manager page Administration Sauvegarde de données Resetting the configuration Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Sauvegarde de données Regenerating the configuration Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Sauvegarde de données Inserting and restoring from restoration points Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Sauvegarde de données Automatic upload Us...

Page 139: ...file saved on the PC Note Any network settings saved in the configuration file will be taken over during automatic uploading If the network settings were not saved in the configuration file the factory network settings will be retained 1 Rename the configuration file saved on the PC to auconfig cfg 2 Save the configuration file in the root directory of a USB memory stick Further steps Perform the ...

Page 140: ... Make sure that the PBX is never left unattended while working with an open casing Close the casing after completing this work Only a qualified electrician may perform installation work within an open casing or service work using the buttons inside the casing If necessary commission a specialised dealer to perform this work Touching voltage carrying conductors or phone connections can cause life t...

Page 141: ...BX Finally the PBX restarts If the Power LED lights up in green again the restart is complete and the PBX is ready for operation Note If the Power LED remains continuously lit in red an error has occurred Please contact your specialised dealer or the manufacturer directly Note Any network settings saved in the configuration file will be taken over during automatic uploading If the network settings...

Page 142: ... forwarding Profile assignment for groups and with it e g announcement before answering exchange line authorisation phone number presentation and group call forwarding Profile assignment for Voice mail and fax boxes and with it e g readiness Fallback options of the external ports Fallback number and delayed fallback Call distribution and door terminal distribution Relay settings in the configurati...

Page 143: ...n Call forwarding of one s own external number CF for MSNs DDI numbers or additional numbers Readiness of the Voice mail and fax boxes Proceed as follows for configuration Creating sonfigurations Using the Configuration Manager page Calendriers Configurations Making settings configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels Résea...

Page 144: ...hone optional see the phone manual Proceed as follows for additional configuration of the automatic configuration switchover Switching automatic configuration switchover on off Using the Configuration Manager page Calendriers Configurations Using a character string on the internal or external phone see Relay Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual under Relay No...

Page 145: ...ration Configuring the permanent configuration Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Réseaux publics Transfert d appel Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Propriétés Réponse aux appels Annonce Note The permanent configuration for CF and the voice mailboxes fax boxes are set independent of each other and do not depend on each other ...

Page 146: ...dvanced Information V13 06 2019 146 LAN TAPI Expalanations and Setting Options Installing TAPI driver TSP Checking the Function of the LAN TAPI Expalanations and Setting OptionsInstalling TAPI driver TSP Checking the Function of the LAN TAPI ...

Page 147: ...work third party network connection onto the separate Microsoft computers so that telephony software e g PBX Call Assist 2 or other TAPI applications can use the TAPI functions The PBX is addressed by the server over the Ethernet interface When a user wants to dial from the client PC the command is forwarded to the server The server signals this to the PBX which then establishes the connection LAN...

Page 148: ...nversations Monitoring status display of the extensions Pick up Do not disturb Blind transfer using ESTOS Important The possible functions are dependent on the end devices applications used Proceed as follows for configuration Making settings for LAN TAPI Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions LAN TAPI Installing TAPI driver TSP ...

Page 149: ...ystem administrator responsible for this Making changes to an existing network may cause considerable functional disturbances Note You can find the current version of the driver on the Internet see Auerswald Auerswald Service Portal FONtevo FONtevo Support Requirements A driver file exe in its current version saved on a data storage device PC Server PC that fulfils one of the following minimum req...

Page 150: ...e driver version the driver may need to be activated at this point If you do not want to activate it yet click the Activate later button 4 In the IP address of the PBX entry field enter the IP address of the PBX Enter the network port of the TAPI server in the Port entry field Enter the password for the network connection of the TAPI server in the Mot de passe and Repeat password entry fields Clic...

Page 151: ...gs configured in the PBX use the dialling help on Windows on the server PC Proceed as follows Using the server PC Requirements A completed TAPI drive installation on the server PC Operating system Windows 10 1 Start Windows dialling help To do this click Démarrer enter dialer exe in the entry field and press Enter 2 Click Extras Connect with In the Line list field select one of the phones offered ...

Page 152: ... V13 06 2019 152 3 In the Numéro de téléphone entry field entry an internal or external number Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it and click Dial The controlled phone is called As soon as you pick up the receiver the destination number dialled in this example 422 is called ...

Page 153: ...st be connected to the PBX This announcement output must be created in the configuration of the PBX and assigned an internal number to call it Proceed as follows for configuration Creating an announcement output with internal number Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Assistant de périphériques Creating a relais and assigning it to an announcement output Using the Configuration Mana...

Page 154: ...ency numbers Réseaux publics Appels d urgence Note If a call is initiated via a targeted exchange line access automatic LCR is not carried out Requirements Support of dial around service by the network provider Proceed as follows for configuration Switching LCR at the external connection on Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Réseaux publics RNIS Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Ré...

Page 155: ... Configuration Manager page Fonctions DISA Call Through Creating LCR data and keeping them up to date Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Routage Soft LCR 4 0 Fournisseur Routage Soft LCR 4 0 Networks and LCR import Routage Soft LCR 4 0 Tableaux LCR Creating the holidays in the calendar of the PBX and switching them on for LCR Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Calen...

Page 156: ...nger digit sequences and macro commands can be dialled more easily The Makrokurzwahlnummers are part of the internal phone numbering plan and therefore must at least have 2 digits Proceed as follows for configuration Configure shorte code macros Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Fonctions Short code macros ...

Page 157: ...lling optional see the phone manual If operated as a system phone the LED of the message key is used for signalling optional see the phone manual Auerswald IP DECT phones The symbol on the display is used for signalling on COMfortel M 100 M 200 M 210 M 300 and M 310 handsets The function can be configured using the Configuration Manager of the IP DECT servers COMfortel WS 400 IP or COMfortel WS 65...

Page 158: ...ation that cannot be applied when the PBX is in operation An automatic restart is executed after the following functions have been carried out An instant firmware update Restoring firmware reboot A factory settings restoration Restoring Configuration Data from a Restoration Point A configuration reset Note Resetting the configuration requires only a limited restart Only some of the PBX functions a...

Page 159: ...his means that all connections to the web server all calls and all data services closed immediately Unsaved data is lost Delayed restart Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Mise à jour et redémarrage du firmware Note A delayed restart runs just like an immediate restart except that current calls are taken into consideration As soon as all of the existing calls have ended also befor...

Page 160: ...ed Note If you want to prevent emergency numbers from being dialled e g to an external subscriber on the same PBX set up a call restrictor for each individual emergency number Emergency calls are then only transmitted via external connections providers accounts on which emergency call ability is enabled If the phone cannot make an emergency call the subscriber is informed by an announcement Emerge...

Page 161: ...eaux publics RNIS Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer Réseaux publics Analogue Connections Réseaux publics VoIP Fournisseur Configurer Réseaux publics VoIP Comptes Configurer Configuring emergency calls Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Appels d urgence Note Public emergency numbers are set as default settings ...

Page 162: ...ring exchange line authorisations Using the Configuration Manager on the pages that follow Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres de ligne Groupes Propriétés Paramètres de ligne If necessary enabling the function Prevention of emergency calls Using the Configuration Manager page Subscriberiber scr Propriétés Paramètres de ligne Managing and assigning audio files for announcements Using the Configuratio...

Page 163: ...s COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 163 Note The PBX is supplied with announcements in English and German You can create other announcements in the local language at a later point in time ...

Page 164: ...y specified for this function and then parked The caller is kept on hold in the PBX and listens to hold music The desired communication partner is then notified of the waiting caller He can then take the call by dialling the phone number that had previously been transferred Proceed as follows for configuration Making settings for call parking Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Parçage ...

Page 165: ...esired data is stored there this information is transferred to the phone The name is shown on the display of a system phone optional see phone manual and saved in the Numéro externe column of the call data list Clicking in the External partner column of the call data list adds the name to the call data record after the fact using the online name search function The name can also be verified and up...

Page 166: ...on V13 06 2019 166 Configuring the text converter Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Recherche de nom en ligne Convertisseur de texte Switching online name search on Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Recherche de nom en ligne Paramètres de base ...

Page 167: ...xternal numbers is additionally enabled multi path call forwarding might work only limited Proceed as follows for configuration Switching multi path call forwarding on Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscribers Abonnés Abo Propriétés Disponibilité For groups Groupes Propriétés Disponibilité Using a character string on the internal or external phone see Follow me Configu...

Page 168: ... taken using same procedure if the call take over has been allowed by the subscriber being called This function is useful for example in the case of answering machines Proceed as follows for configuration Switching authorisation for pick up for the involved internal phones on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Droits Switching call take over for the involved internal phone...

Page 169: ...ld BLF allows VoIP end devices to monitor other internal subscribers groups waiting positions of call parking voice mail fax boxes or door terminals and receive information about their calls As precondition for the display of phone numbers the monitored subscriber or group must have enabled preliminary pick up query and monitoring Whether voice mail and fax boxes can be monitored in this way depen...

Page 170: ...or configuration Switching preliminary pick up query and monitoring on Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscribers Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres For groups Groupes Propriétés Paramètres Configuring preliminary pick up query and monitoring configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscribers Abonnés Abo Profils Paramètres For ...

Page 171: ...e can take over the call If the function Pick up of all calls to group members is enabled not only calls to the phone number to the group but also calls directly to the phone number of a group member will be signalised Proceed as follows for configuration Switching pick up of all calls to group members on Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Paramètres Configuring pick up of all...

Page 172: ...ccess calls initiated are given a special identification while the call data is being recorded This allows the charges to be billed to the employee Proceed as follows for configuration Switching differently configurable functions for private and business calls on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Tous les abonnés If necessary switching private exchange line access without PIN entry ...

Page 173: ...configuration Create profiles for subscribers and assign them depending on the configuration Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Abonnés Abo Profils Configuration Abonnés Abo Profils Affectation des profils Create profiles for groups and assign them depending on the configuration Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Groupes Profils Configuration Groupes Profils...

Page 174: ...tomers clients Note On a system phone the project number can be selected not only before the call but also during a call optional see the phone manual This makes the assignment of incoming calls for billing the time expenditure possible Requirements Assigning of project numbers function enabled optional see Activation Proceed as follows for configuration If necessary configuring a project list on ...

Page 175: ...tion V13 06 2019 175 Provisioning for IP Phones Device Configurability and Characteristics and Setting Options Provisioning Files Creating a New Provisioning File Device Configurability and Characteristics and Setting OptionsProvisioning FilesCreating a New Provisioning File ...

Page 176: ...cessary configuration data You find further information about provisioning in the Auerswald Service Portal Developer The phone takes the configuration data directly from a file distributed over the network Configurability COMfortel 1200 IP Yes but not automatically by PBX search COMfortel 1400 IP Yes COMfortel 2600 IP Yes COMfortel 3200 Yes but not automatically by PBX search COMfortel 3500 Yes bu...

Page 177: ...r For further information refer to the Advanced Information of the IP phones Specific characteristics COMfortel 1200 IP The COMfortel 1200 IP is no system phone and cannot be configured automatically by PBX search therefore further settings on the phone are required see Advanced Information of the phone However the phone can be identified by its MAC address Specific characteristics COMfortel 1400 ...

Page 178: ...es automatically find the provisioning server in factory settings state and automatically carry out a new provisioning if changes are made With the templates contained in a provisioning file the functionality of the phone can be extended These additional functions can be assigned to function keys see Advanced Information of the phone You find further information in the Auerswald DocuWiki Proceed a...

Page 179: ...tarting with https see manual of the phone Note For COMfortel 3200 3500 you must enter https IP Anlage 4433 provdata mac MACADR under Paramètres Update and Provisioning Automatic Provisioning Provisioning Server Proceed as follows for configuration page Abonnés Abo Provisioning d IP Paramètres Switching provisioning on off Switching access without client certificate on off Switching provisioning o...

Page 180: ...ning file can also be generated from a standard provisioning file by saving it under a different file name You will find more information about provisioning files in the Auerswald Service Portal under Developer Provisioning templates Provisioning templates are a specific form of provisioning files A provisioning file can be saved and selected in the PBX If an IP phone requests a provisioning the P...

Page 181: ...nation of both variants is permitted The header file is the file that the phone must read first It can contain references to sub files Any files can be imported however Auerswald FONtevo IP phones only support xml files You will find further information about header files in the Auerswald Service Portal under Developer Variables as placeholders Variables for the parameters to be provisioned are cr...

Page 182: ...ditor under Abonnés Abo Provisioning d IP Gestion des fichiers Éditer ID de compte 1 Open the Configuration Manager of the IP phone via its IP address 2 Open the page Paramètres Personal Backup and reset 3 In the line Phone configuration under Create backup click Exporter 4 Accept the legal notes by entering ok in the entry field at the bottom right 5 Click Exporter 6 Save the xml file created in ...

Page 183: ...Template the section providersAndAccounts providersAndAccounts must not be deleted as it is replaced by the subscriber specific data by the PBX 10 If required open the level by clicking in order to modify the settings made there Note We recommend to contact your system administrator or specialised dealer for editing provisioning files if necessary ...

Page 184: ...s Actuators COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 184 Relays Actuators Expalanations and Setting Options Relay Operating Modes Expalanations and Setting OptionsRelay Operating Modes ...

Page 185: ...ng has a special position It can only be used in the operating type automatic configuration switchover to switch it via phone on or off For this purpose the relay is being switched on or off For the operation of standard phones see Relay for system phones see manual of the phone Proceed as follows for configuration Creating an IP switch relay Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Assi...

Page 186: ...authorisation for switching of relays and alarms for the involved internal phones on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Droits Switching relays Using a character string on the internal or external phone see Relay Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual ...

Page 187: ...he assigned device e g an a b Audiobox The PBX switches the relay off as soon as the audio connection is terminated Possible use Switching an LED of the door terminal Switching the loudspeaker area of the loudspeaker system for the announcement output Door opener The relay is assigned to a door terminal The PBX switches on the relay as soon as an internal subscriber triggers door opening for the a...

Page 188: ... to an alarm The PBX switches on the relay as soon as the assigned alarm is triggered Alternatively switching can be triggered manually by phone The PBX switches off the relay after the defined switching duration Alternatively switching off can be triggered by phone after the alarm has been acknowledged Possible use Switching a siren or an indicator light Music on hold The relay is assigned to mus...

Page 189: ...ng duration Possible use Switching a PC Second ringer The relay is assigned to a subscriber a group or a door call The PBX switches on the relay as soon as the assigned subscriber or group is being called or at the start of a door call The PBX switches off the relay at the end of the call Possible use Switching a second ringer Configuration dependent The relay is assigned to one or more configurat...

Page 190: ...ly switching on off can be triggered manually by phone Slave relay The relay is assigned to another relay master The PBX switches the relay together with the assigned relay Manual relay The PBX does not automatically switch the relay on and off Switching on off can only be triggered manually by phone ...

Page 191: ...ternal ISDN connection or a VoIP account can be reserved for the group This call channel is only available for subscribers who are logged in this group outgoing Proceed as follows for configuration Switching call channel reservation on Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Disponibilité Configuring call channel reservation configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager p...

Page 192: ...e analogue phone The prerequisite is that the caller transmits a phone number A few CLIP capable analogue phones support the recording of the date and time in conjunction with the caller list On some it is also possible to display the name instead of or in addition to the phone number Proceed as follows for configuration Switching CLIP information for the internal analogue phones on Using the Conf...

Page 193: ...can be calculated correctly The number presentation incoming lets you present the actual number reached to the incoming caller The number presented back to you may be one of the numbers from the exchange line connection reached This number may be different than the number actually dialled by the caller This is useful if for example another subscriber takes the call via pick up or call forwarding i...

Page 194: ...figuring the number presentation outgoing and incoming and number suppression configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscribers Abonnés Abo Profils Paramètres de ligne For groups Groupes Profils Paramètres de ligne Configuring the number presentation internal for group calls Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Paramètres Configuring ...

Page 195: ...n V13 06 2019 195 Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Types Call Forwarding for Subscribers Call Forwarding for Groups Call Forwarding for External Numbers Call Forwarding TypesCall Forwarding for SubscribersCall Forwarding for GroupsCall Forwarding for External Numbers ...

Page 196: ...ing The call is forwarded immediately CF on busy The call is forwarded immediately but only if the phone being called is busy CF on no reply The phone being called rings for a certain amount of time If the call is not accepted it is forwarded Note A different destination can be configured for each of the three call forwarding types Note If Transf si occupé and Transf si non réponse are enabled at ...

Page 197: ...l Forwarding Types COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 197 but remain enabled As soon as CF unconditional is disabled the other types that are still enabled are again applicable ...

Page 198: ...he subscriber cannot take a call on his own phone Proceed as follows for configuration Switching authorisations for the involved internal subscribers on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Droits Note The forwarding subscriber needs an authorisation e g for external destinations For configuring using a character string on an internal phone the subscriber needs an authorisat...

Page 199: ...rding for Subscribers Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Using the menu T Net function key on an analogue T Net phone optional see the phone manual Making additional settings for call forwarding Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Disponibilité Configuring the call forwarding configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager pa...

Page 200: ...hone if at least one member of the group has LCR enabled It does not matter if the corresponding subscriber is logged in or not Note When forwarding a group the option Comme les abonnés in the exchange line settings of the group is not considered For call forwarding instead exchange line authorisation is not restricted and no call restrictors and call deblockers are used Note Preferred exchange li...

Page 201: ...guring using a character string on an internal phone the subscriber needs an authorisation for controlling of the PBX Configuring sufficient exchange line authorisations for the involved internal subscribers Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres de ligne Note The destination subscriber needs a sufficient exchange line authorisation for taking external calls Switchi...

Page 202: ...rwarding for Groups COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 202 Configuring the call forwarding configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Profils Disponibilité ...

Page 203: ...ation Note If you want to also forward internal calls use call forwarding for subscribers or for groups instead of call forwarding for external numbers This also allows forwarding to internal phones Note The function can be configured with a voip exchange line via keypad codes depending on the provider via the keypad of the phone To do this you must first switch to internal if you have direct exch...

Page 204: ...m phone optional see the phone manual Configuring the call forwarding configuration dependent Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Transfert d appel Making additional settings for call forwarding Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Réseaux publics RNIS Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer Réseaux...

Page 205: ...tion with multiple external numbers e g ISDN connection You can configure both one phone for multiple phone numbers and multiple phones group for one phone number to ring Requirements Configured external numbers Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Réseaux publics RNIS Réseaux publics VoIP Configured internal numbers Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Abonnés ...

Page 206: ...anced Information V13 06 2019 206 Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels Setting the modem fax call distribution for analogue connections Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels ...

Page 207: ...to trigger a door call or an alarm Proceed as follows for configuration Creating a switch input for an alarm Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Alarmes Creating a switch input for a door call Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Interphones Configuring switch inputs Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Périphériques Alarmes Entrée Périphériques Inter...

Page 208: ...Service Data COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 208 Service Data Setting Options Recording the D Channel Protocol Setting OptionsRecording the D Channel Protocol ...

Page 209: ... a log can be recorded This can then be forwarded to the specialist departments Serice Development for troubleshooting Proceed as follows for configuration Make settings for logging Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Logs Log network data stream Using the Configuration Manager page Surveillance Flux de données réseau ...

Page 210: ...n Proceed as follows Using the D channel decoder PC programme Requirements D channel decoder PC programme installed see Auerswald Auerswald Service Portal FONtevo FONtevo Logging enabled function switched on in the PBX D channel option selected in the PBX 1 Start the D channel decoder computer programme 2 Click Démarrer 3 In the Interface list field select the IP option 4 Enter the IPv4 address or...

Page 211: ...tocol being recording Further steps The technical departments Service and Development can use this file to perform troubleshooting If the cause of the error cannot be found in the protocol your specialised dealer or the Service Department see Auerswald Service Portal will set additional categories and record an extended protocol ...

Page 212: ...X can be protected from unauthorised access Administrator The administrator has unrestricted access to the Configuration Manager The PBX can be configured completely and the PINS of the other users internal subscribers can be changed with this access Sub administrator A maximum of four sub administrators can be configured The access authorisations to the Web interface are assigned to the sub admin...

Page 213: ...s may differ depending on the profiles Additional app passwords for subscribers The subscriber password is used for SIP registration and the access to the Configuration Manager and API Therefore PBX access data must frequently be saved in external systems This will lead to security risks if these systems are insufficiently secured Therefore additional subscriber passwords for accessing the Configu...

Page 214: ...Dealer and operator data Configuring sub administrator access Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Droits PINs and passwords for sub administrators and users Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Configurer Generating additional app passwords Configuration Manager API for a subscriber Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de...

Page 215: ... e mails register in Configuration Manager simple malfunctions e g automatic memory clean up and memory check Voice Mail Fax function errors serious malfunctions e g fan fault only COMpact 5000R 5200R 5500R alarm temperature exceeded security warnings e g failed logon attempts entries in the IP blacklist Admin password change Proceed as follows to set up system messages Configure DNS server Using ...

Page 216: ...tion Manager page Administration Courrier électronique Gestion des logos Set up the sending of system e mails and event logging Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Administration Messages système Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Périphériques Voice mial fax boxes Propriétés Paramètres de boîte ...

Page 217: ...criber with an internal number Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Assigning properties to the subscribers Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Abonnés Abo Profils Abonnés Abo Synthèse des fonctions Abonnés Abo Propriétés Configuring provisioning for IP phones Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Abonnés Abo Provisioning d IP Pa...

Page 218: ...Subscribers COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 218 Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Téléphones non attribués ...

Page 219: ...by the PBX for max 8 minutes If the call is not taken within these 8 minutes it is disconnected The on hold time is reduced if internal subscribers are ringing but not taking the call Then the caller is rejected after less than 8 minutes Note If the announcement before answering is enabled it may be necessary to use the Busy on Busy function to limit the number of callers that are automatically pu...

Page 220: ...g announcement before answering Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Disponibilité Switching announcement before answering on Using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Propriétés Disponibilité Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Switching announcement before answering for fallback on Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics ...

Page 221: ...system phones and standard VoIP phones from Auerswald FONtevo The sending and receiving of text messages takes place via SIP via the instant messaging app optional see manual of the phone IP DECT phones from Auerswald The handsets COMfortel M 100 M 200 M 210 M 300 and M 310 only support the receiving of text messages via Standard VoIP end decives of other manufacturers Prerequisire for the support...

Page 222: ... On standard VoIP phones a dial tone is generated by the phone itself even when no free line is available Confirmation tone At the completion of programming when the programming has been successfully executed Busy tone After picking up the receiver when no free line is available or an authorisation is missing After dialling a phone number when the desired connection is busy or the network is overl...

Page 223: ...l when call waiting has been enabled when another call comes in it is possible to accept or reject the additional call Changing tone During a Call Through call when the phone number transferred from the mobile phone is permitted to use Call Through dialling a phone number is possible During a remote programming call when the connection for remote programming is available programming is possible Pr...

Page 224: ...Tones COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 224 ...

Page 225: ...pener from internal phones Proceed as follows for configuration Creating a door terminal Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Assistant de périphériques Configuring door terminals Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Interphones Configurer Creating a door call and assigning it to the door terminal Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Interphones Configurin...

Page 226: ...Door Functions COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 226 Using the Configuration Manager page Subscriber scr Propriétés Droits ...

Page 227: ...ystems such as the GIRA calling system 834 plus for example It permits the transmission of text messages entered as display name during an internal call Note In combination with the alarm device function see Alarm Device text messages can be sent and signallised accordingly Note For text messages without a simultaneous call you can send text messages via SIP RFC 3428 see Text Messages Instant Mess...

Page 228: ...on V13 06 2019 228 Sub System Operation Setting Options Transferring a Caller of the Main PBX to Another Subscriber on the Main PBX from the Sub System PBX Setting OptionsTransferring a Caller of the Main PBX to Another Subscriber on the Main PBX from the Sub System PBX ...

Page 229: ...subscribers in the main PBX Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Nouveau Note The corresponding subscribers in main and subordinate PBX must have the same internal phone number Module Port VoIP Type de périphérique Téléphone VoIP par défaut Switching internal phone on for each subscriber Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Configur...

Page 230: ...UN server set Serveur STUN pour connexion à des abonnés VoIP extérieurs page Administration Configuration VoIP Make the following settings for the provider Auerswald Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics VoIP Fournisseur Configurer Domaine IP address of main PBX Registre IP address of main PBX Fonctionnement du sous système Format du numéro de téléphone composé envoyer comme composé...

Page 231: ...ès à la ligne principale numéro de compte 2 to 4 digit number Nom d utilisateur Internal phone number of the VoIP subscriber of the main PBX Mot de passe PIN of the VoIP subscriber of the main PBX Note We recommend to use a password for remote extensions Le compte peut passer des appels d urgence disabled Assigning each subscriber to the corresponding account Using the Configuration Manager page R...

Page 232: ...e business Lignes privilégiées spéciales Creating call distribution Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels Acheminement des appels pour Raccordements multi périphériques VoIP and account name No de téléphone interne Nom Assign internal phone numbers one to one to MSNs ...

Page 233: ...dinate PBX Authorisation Transfert d appels externes vers l extérieur assigned to the subscriber of the subordinate PBX page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Droits Note Set the maximum duration of the transferred call page Abonnés Abo Tous les abonnés to limit the time the two external VoIP channels are occupied 1 Initiate a query call to the other subscriber on the main PBX 2 Hang up the receiver while th...

Page 234: ...g the authorisation for external call transfer externally on Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Droits Configuring sufficient exchange line authorisations for the involved internal subscribers Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres de ligne Note The transferring subscriber needs a sufficient exchange line authorisation for making external ca...

Page 235: ...Transfer and Callback COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 235 Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer ...

Page 236: ...ce mail and fax boxes Setting Options Management Voice Mail Fax Function and Memory Messagerie vocale Operating and Querying a Voice Mailbox Fax Box Fax Transfer Setting OptionsManagement Voice Mail Fax Function and MemoryMessagerie vocaleOperating and Querying a Voice MailboxFax BoxFax Transfer ...

Page 237: ...ion Switching a box for a subscriber group on off Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Configurer Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Switching the info call for a voice mailbox on off Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Configurer Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Configuring and subscribing the RSS feed Using the Configurat...

Page 238: ...files incoming faxes and voice messages are stored on the required USB data storage device Caution Do not remove the USB data storage device while the system is running Switch off the PBX before removing the USB data storage device Note A directory structure is created on the USB data storage device You should not change this structure Note The USB data storage device must have at least 50 MB free...

Page 239: ...rrier électronique on incoming message if memory is full or in case of failure of automatic clean up Enabling Call pick up for the voice mailbox and the Groups s Voice mailbox es authorisation for the owners users under Pick up see Abonnés Abo Propriétés Droits Selecting further users and enabling or disabling their authorisations Administrate announcements and settings Recording box own announcem...

Page 240: ... to be configured Proceed as follows for configuration Switching voice mailbox for a subscriber on off Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Configurer Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Switching info call on off Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Configurer Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Configuration of a voice mailbox Using the Configurat...

Page 241: ...on V13 06 2019 241 Operating and Querying a Voice Mailbox Information Notes and Method Using an Internal or External Phone Remote Access to Operate and Query a Voice Mailbox Information Notes and MethodUsing an Internal or External Phone Remote Access to Operate and Query a Voice Mailbox ...

Page 242: ...ed by the LED on the message key optional see phone manual Note Note On standard phones and COMfortel 1100 system phones recently received voice messages can also be signalled as info calls Note In addition the users of a voice mailbox can be informed about new voice messages by e mail or by SIP MWI optional Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Using a character string on an internal...

Page 243: ...ilbox via phone Requirements Imported language file fs Knowledge of the PIN for accessing the corresponding voice mailbox remotely DTMF dialling support on the external phone 1 Call the voice mailbox Note Remote access is also possible with disabled readiness of a voice mailbox External calls will be accepted after a waiting time of at least 50 seconds 50 seconds or Waiting time for CF on no reply...

Page 244: ...layed message 8 Ends playback 10 Disables voice mailbox 11 Enables voice mailbox 20 Recording and changing of announcements Note The default announcement and own announcements are played back Meanwhile the following functions are available Selects the currently heard announcement as active 4 Goes to previous announcemnet 5 Repeats current announcement 6 Goes to next announcement 7 Selects the curr...

Page 245: ...31 Enables message forwarding 70 Deletes messages and voice memos 99 Records voice memos Hanging up ends remote access Additional function while a message is being replayed 9 Plays back the phone number of the caller provided it has been transferred Further options after announcement of the phone number Initiates call back Possible call back is cancelled ...

Page 246: ...e of failure of automatic clean up or after fax transfer Numéro de fax for the fax transfer Selecting further users for the fax box and enable or disable their authorisations Administrer les paramètres Assigning a profile Configuration of Réponse aux appels Rejet des appels anonymes provided that no profile has been assigned or settings have been made in the profile which can be switched by the us...

Page 247: ...V13 06 2019 247 Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Configurer Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Configuration of a fax box Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Propriétés ...

Page 248: ...ander Fax on PC Configuring the Printer Driver COMpact COMmander Fax Sending a fax to a recipient Send a fax to multiple recipients Broadcasting file InformationInstalling Printer Driver COMpact COMmander Fax on PCConfiguring the Printer Driver COMpact COMmander FaxSending a fax to a recipientSend a fax to multiple recipients Broadcasting file ...

Page 249: ... COMmander Fax printer driver has to be installed on the PC used The COMpact COMmander Fax printer driver transfers the document to be faxed to the PBX that subsequently saves the document for the fax box used and sends it in the background using the corresponding fax identification If the destination of the fax is not available busy or no reply two further dial up attempts will automatically be m...

Page 250: ...C You the fax printer driver in the Internet see Auerswald Auerswald Service Portal FONtevo FONtevo Support 1 Download the printer driver and start the driver installation 2 Select the desired language and click Ok and Next 3 Read the license agreement and subsequently click I accept the terms of the license agreement Click Next 4 Click Continue installation 5 Click Finish ...

Page 251: ...Via the printer selection select the printer driver COMpact COMmander Fax 2 If necessary enter a name for your identification in the entry field Name of the fax box Note It is appropriate to use the same name that has been assigned for the fax box in the Configuration Manager of the PBX 3 In the Subscriber Group number entry field enter the internal number of the owner of the fax box in question 4...

Page 252: ...heck the login data are checked A window opens displaying the check result Click Ok to close this window 6 Select or clear the check box Prefix automatically for the exchange line access number of the fax number of the recipient 7 In the Code d accès à la ligne principale entry field enter the exchange line access number of the PBX 8 If necessary click Nouveau and repeat steps 2 to 7 in order to c...

Page 253: ...Mpact COMmander Fax in the printer selection dialogue 3 Under Fax number of the recipient enter the corresponding phone number special characters _ Important Depending on the configuration of the fax box in the printer driver the exchange line access number of the PBX automatically precedes the fax number or has to be entered in front of the Fax number of the recipient Note The entered phone numbe...

Page 254: ...A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 254 5 Click Send 6 Click Fermer Note To cancel the fax transfer delete the fax message under Données des utilisateurs Messages administrator or Messages boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie user in the Configuration Manager ...

Page 255: ...max 18 digits per phone number special characters Important Depending on the configuration of the fax box in the printer driver the exchange line access number of the PBX automatically precedes the fax number or has to be entered in front of the fax number of the recipient 2 Open the document you want to send as a fax 3 Print the file and therefor select COMpact COMmander Fax in the printer select...

Page 256: ...essage is 507 fax sending is interrupted for 3 minutes and then restarted After 10 unsuccessful attempts the transmission is stopped 7 Click Fermer Note To cancel the fax transfer delete the fax message under Données des utilisateurs Messages administrator or Messages boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie user in the Configuration Manager ...

Page 257: ...nformation V13 06 2019 257 VoIP Note Configuring External Internet Telephony Configuring Internal IP Telephony Configuring Remote Extensions NoteConfiguring External Internet TelephonyConfiguring Internal IP TelephonyConfiguring Remote Extensions ...

Page 258: ...COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 258 Note The transmission quality and the reliability of Voice over IP depends to a great extent on the quality of the Internet connection used ...

Page 259: ...l as an external VoIP channel 2 Make sure you have current VoIP provider data Check previously configured provider data Download and import provider data from the Internet Enter provider data manually 3 Configure the DNS server 4 Create at least one VoIP account in the PBX and enter the account and access data 5 Enter your own VoIP phone numbers 6 Set up call distribution for incoming calls 7 If n...

Page 260: ...e If no calls are possible via VoIP although account registration and perhaps even an initial call were successful this might have something to do with a very short timeout configured in the firewall Reduce the Interval for NAT Keep Alive for all of the providers used Réseaux publics VoIP Fournisseur Configurer ...

Page 261: ...ibers 4 If required change the automatically generated PINs and passwords Note The user passwords are needed to authenticate the VoIP phones when they are registered with the PBX 5 Configure the VoIP end devices To do this you need the following information IP address or URL of the PBX SIP port of the internal VoIP registrar Internal number of the VoIP subscriber User password of the VoIP subscrib...

Page 262: ...ware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 262 7 If necessary enable DiffServ to increase VoIP call quality Quality of Service QoS 8 If necessary make the VoIP settings Jitter buffer Echo cancellation for the VoIP subscribers to improve the call quality ...

Page 263: ...data recording of your PBX and the LOGs of your NAT router for inconsistencies Important For security reasons the connection of remote extensions by means of a VPN tunnel should be preferred Important Note that when using a remote extension emergency calls can only be traced backed to the location of the PBX localisation Localisation is necessary if the caller is no longer able to give his name an...

Page 264: ...e the internal numbers for the external private branch exchanges a maximum of two VoIP subscribers is recommended 3 If required change the automatically generated PINs and passwords Note The user passwords are needed to authenticate the VoIP phones when they are registered with the PBX 4 In dependence on the phone tariffs restrict the exchange line authorisation for remote extensions e g National ...

Page 265: ...rar and domain The internal number of the VoIP subscribers as MSN or user name The user password of the VoIP subscriber as registration PIN or password STUN server the same as in Step 6 Size of the jitter buffer the same as in Step 7 Note If the Internet connection on the PBX does not have a permanent IP address an account with a provider for dynamic DNS is also required e g dyndns org Enter the a...

Page 266: ... specified in the exception numbers and switched on for the current configuration If the phone number is found the PBX automatically forwards the dial attempt to the first selected connection If the selected connection is busy when dialled the next connection selected is attempted up to three are possible After a dial attempt with the third connection if no connection is established you hear the b...

Page 267: ...account number targeted VoIP access point Alternatively you can enter such numbers as service numbers under Public swichted tel networks Appels d urgence Numéros de service Note If no particular connection has been selected for door to external calls the routing is performed depending on the destination number Note For Call Through calls the routing performed is dependent on the destination number...

Page 268: ...provider Note When you dial one of the local numbers phone number without a prefix listed in the exception number table over a GSM connection the phone number is automatically prefixed with the area code specified under Administration Indicatif Proceed as follows for configuration Creating exception numbers Using the Configuration Manager page Routage Routage VoIP GSM Numéros de téléphone d except...

Page 269: ...ng the preferred exchange line Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages For subscriber Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres de ligne For groups Groupes Propriétés Paramètres de ligne For the exchange line transfer function Fonctions Prise de la ligne principale For the Call Through function Fonctions DISA Call Through Configuring the preferred exchange line configuration dependent Using...

Page 270: ...rs configured for the phone parallel calls as well as the do not disturb function are switched off A rework time configured for the group does not work Not until the waiting field reception is switched off on the phone will these functions for example call forwarding on an answering machine become available again The function in question except parallel calling rework time must be switched on agai...

Page 271: ... as normal If the line of the person being called is busy the external subscriber can be placed in that person s queue If the person being called does not accept the call the external caller is put back in the waiting field This is signalled by an attention tone if enabled If there is no one in the waiting field you can make calls as normal and use the keys on the phone without limitations As long...

Page 272: ...ribers should be Permanently logged in Managing and assigning audio files for announcements Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Gestion des fichiers Fonctions Musique d attente Annonces Affectation des fichiers Annonce d accueil Using a character string on the internal phone see Announcement before Answering Configuring announcement befo...

Page 273: ...3 Selecting the group for the waiting field and making settings for the waiting field Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions File d attente On each waiting field reception assigning one or more waiting field keys and one internal waiting field key optional see manual for the phone ...

Page 274: ...iguration Manager page Fonctions Musique d attente Annonces Affectation des fichiers Using a character string on the internal phone see Music on Hold and Announcement Managing and assigning audio files for announcement and music on hold Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Gestion des fichiers Fonctions Musique d attente Annonces Affectat...

Page 275: ...Music on Hold and Announcement COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 275 Fonctions Standard automatiques SVI Configurer ...

Page 276: ...ake up on off Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Heures de réveil Using a character string on the internal phone see Wake up Functions Managing and assigning audio files for announcements Using the Configuration Manager on the following pages Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Gestion des fichiers Fonctions Musique d attente Annonces Affectation des fichiers Annonces de réveil U...

Page 277: ... and if the central caller list for groups is enabled the phone number is also deleted from the caller lists of the other members of the group Note Group wide deletion does not occur if the person calling back has already deleted his caller list or has been called again by the same caller on his subscriber number Requirements All group members are system phones that support the central caller list...

Page 278: ...sing Different Phone Types Incoming Calls Call Waiting Calls Outgoing Calls Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls Query Calls Transferring Conference Calls Using Different Phone TypesIncoming CallsCall Waiting CallsOutgoing CallsUnsuccessful Outgoing CallsQuery CallsTransferringConference Calls ...

Page 279: ... phones specific T Net functions can be performed in the analogue T Net via the menu or via specific function keys If you are operating such a phone as an internal subscriber you can also use these comfortable operating modes for some functions of the PBX Please note that the T Net functions of the phone are limited because the PBX doesn t support some functions If you want to use the T Net functi...

Page 280: ...ns described can only be used on the system phones specified in the description Standard VoIP Phones On some standard VoIP phones functions such as Double appel Conference Query calling and Hold are not carried out via the PBX but rather on the phone itself Therefore the instructions for operating these functions may deviate from the descriptions in this guide For more information on this read the...

Page 281: ...Taking over a Call Pick up Taking over a Call Call Take over Accepting Door Call and Opening the Door Accepting an Alarm Call and Confirming the Alarm Accepting Incoming CallsTaking over a Call Pick up Taking over a Call Call Take over Accepting Door Call and Opening the DoorAccepting an Alarm Call and Confirming the Alarm ...

Page 282: ...ing Incoming Calls COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 282 Accepting Incoming Calls When you receive a call proceed as follows Pick up the receiver You are connected with the caller ...

Page 283: ...bscriber To pick up an external call Discrimination assigned to the subscriber for incoming calls International National Localité or Entrants uniquement avec appel d urgence If an internal phone rings proceed as follows 1 Pick up the receiver of your phone Note During an existing call press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 06 3 Enter the internal number of the phone that is ringing Possible e...

Page 284: ...appel enabled for the subscriber To perform call take over of an external call Discrimination assigned to the subscriber for incoming calls International National Localité or Entrants uniquement avec appel d urgence If the answering machine has already taken the call proceed as follows 1 Pick up the receiver Note During an existing call press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 06 3 Enter the in...

Page 285: ...Taking over a Call Call Take over COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 285 Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding ...

Page 286: ... number You can also carry out various door functions such as speech connection with the door and actuation of the door opener from internal phones Proceed as follows Using an internal phone Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Requirements Configured door terminal Configured door call Configured relay with operating mode Gâche Authorisation Ouvrir la porte a...

Page 287: ...Accepting Door Call and Opening the Door COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 287 3 Dial ...

Page 288: ...rnal phone Requirements DTMF capable phone or DTMF dialler If an alarm is signaled at an internal or external phone proceed as follows 1 Pick up the receiver You will hear the announcement 2 Within the next 60 seconds dial 0 You will hear the confirmation tone Note You can confirm the alarm already during the announcement If you do not confirm the alarm or dial a wrong digit you will hear the busy...

Page 289: ...19 289 Call Waiting Calls Rejecting a Call Waiting Call Accepting the Call Waiting Call Disconnecting the Current Call and Accepting the Call Waiting Call Rejecting a Call Waiting CallAccepting the Call Waiting CallDisconnecting the Current Call and Accepting the Call Waiting Call ...

Page 290: ...u can reject the call waiting call The caller receives a busy signal as long as no other phones are called If a call waiting call is signalled proceed as follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 0 Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone Note On ISDN and system phones this functio...

Page 291: ...Your previous communication partner hears the hold music If a call waiting call is signaled proceed as follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 2 Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone Note On ISDN and system phones this function is performed via an existing function key or via ...

Page 292: ...cepted At the same time the ongoing call is ended If a call waiting call is signalled proceed as follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 1 Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone Note Note On ISDN and system phones this function is performed via an existing function key or via t...

Page 293: ...itiating Calls with Project Assignment Calling a Door and Opening the Door Initiating InterCom Announcement Hands Free Initiating Loudspeaker Announcement Initiating an Internal CallInitiating an External CallInitiating an External Call with Calling Line Identity RestrictionInitiating Private Exchange Line AccessInitiating Private Exchange Line Access without a PINInitiating Targeted Exchange Line...

Page 294: ...ernal number of the individual phone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Once you have finished dialling the phone number the subscriber will be called Note If the internally called subscriber is busy you can knock on his phone after a short waiting if call wai...

Page 295: ...p the receiver 2 Enter an external number Possible entries External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Short code number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Once you have finished dialling the phone number the subscriber will be called ...

Page 296: ...the internal phone Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Requirements The CLIR calling line identity restriction service feature has been enabled by the network operator 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Dial 31 3 Enter an external number Possible entries External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Short code...

Page 297: ...nual for the phone Note If an emergency number is called while calling line identity restriction is enabled calling line identity restriction is disabled so that the emergency service can identify the caller Note The feature code keypad to execute the function as defined in the PBX may differ from the requirements of the network provider In case of malfunctions ask your network provider for the re...

Page 298: ...ss on any internal phone by entering the user PIN Personal calls are assigned to the subscriber in question in the call data record based on the user PIN Requirements User PIN configured for the subscriber 1 Pick up the receiver of any internal phone 2 Dial 92 3 Enter the user PIN 4 Dial 5 Enter the external number Possible entries External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with...

Page 299: ...riber allows private exchange line access without requiring a user PIN to be initiated on the subscriber s own phone The charges are billed to the phone used Requirements Authorisation Accès privé à la ligne sans PIN assigned to the subscriber 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Dial 91 3 Enter the external number Possible entries External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding e...

Page 300: ...he menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Requirements External S0 port external analogue port optional see Technical Data in the Instructions 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Dial 96 3 Enter the separate external number to be transmitted Possible entries External numbers 4 Dial 5 Enter an external number Possible entries External number for exchange line request type Internal p...

Page 301: ...ware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 301 Force Public Exchange Call for Automatic Exchange Line Request 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Select 94 3 Enter an external number Possible entries External number Once you have finished dialling the phone number the subscriber will be called ...

Page 302: ...he phone manual 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Enter the account number Possible entries Internal number of the VoIP account for exchange line request types Direct exchange line phone and Automatic exchange line request with preceding 3 Enter an external number Possible entries External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Note In any case the e...

Page 303: ...Initiating Targeted VoIP Access COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 303 Note No callback is possible CCBS or CCNR for outgoing calls over VoIP ...

Page 304: ...ojects customers clients Proceed as follows Using a character string on the internal phone Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Requirements Assigning of project numbers function enabled optional see Activation 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Dial 93 3 Enter the 2 to 6 digit project number 4 Dial 5 Enter an external number Possible entries External number for exchan...

Page 305: ...connection with the door and actuation of the door opener from internal phones Proceed as follows Using an internal phone Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Requirements Configured door terminal Configured relay with operating mode Gâche Authorisation Ouvrir la porte assigned to subscriber or group 1 Pick up the receiver Note During a call press the Flash k...

Page 306: ...Calling a Door and Opening the Door COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 306 3 Press the Flash key or the Query key 4 Dial ...

Page 307: ...t a person nearby can speak with the caller using this intercom system Proceed as follows Using a character string on the internal phone Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Requirements Enabled InterCom authorisation at the InterCom destination 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Dial one of the following character strings 011 Initiates an InterCom announcement 012 Ini...

Page 308: ...g a character string on the internal phone Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Requirements Created announcement output Authorisation Annonce du haut parleur assigned to the subscriber 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Enter the internal number of the announcement output for exchange line request type Poste directement raccordé à la ligne principale with preceding Th...

Page 309: ...ervation of Exchange Line on Busy Initiating Internal Callback on No Response Initiating External Callback on No Response Initiating Priority Call for Do Not Disturb Initiating Internal Callback on BusyInitiating External Callback on BusyDeleting Callback on BusyInitiating Reservation of Exchange Line on BusyInitiating Internal Callback on No ResponseInitiating External Callback on No ResponseInit...

Page 310: ...ed via the menu phone app optional see manual for the phone Important To use this function at ISDN phones or to delete it again this function must be supported via a function key or via the menu by the respective phone optional see manual for the phone Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone ...

Page 311: ...5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 311 Note If you do not pick up the receiver within the 20 seconds during which the PBX calls you the callback request will be deleted If you pick up the receiver the subscriber will be called ...

Page 312: ...tance not all network providers provide callback on a PTP connection Service feature CCBS callback on busy is enabled by the network provider Important On system phones this function is called via the menu phone app optional see manual for the phone Note To use this function at ISDN phones or to delete it again this function must be supported via a function key or via the menu by the respective ph...

Page 313: ...iver to the make the callback Note If you do not pick up the receiver within the 20 seconds during which the public exchange calls you the callback request will be deleted If you pick up the receiver the subscriber will be called Note You also have the option of letting the public exchange call you as soon as one of the B channels on the previously called ISDN connection is available If the subscr...

Page 314: ...l Callback on Busy COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 314 on the exchange line instead the subscriber needs the authorisation for configuring features to be configured by the network provider ...

Page 315: ...llback on Busy If you want to delete the callback on busy initiated by you ahead of time proceed as follows 1 Pick up the receiver 2 Dial 37 3 Hang up the receiver The callback on busy will be deleted Important If you use an analogue access for the external call you will not be able to delete the callback ...

Page 316: ... signal before finishing the dialling process proceed as follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 37 You will hear the confirmation tone 3 Hang up the receiver As soon as a line is available you will be called back by the PBX 4 Pick up the receiver You will hear the external dial tone 5 Dial an external number without an exchange line access number Note When using ISDN phones you cann...

Page 317: ... use this function at ISDN phones or to delete it again this function must be supported via a function key or via the menu by the respective phone optional see manual for the phone Note Some analogue phones permit this function via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone If the subscriber does not answer your call proceed as follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Di...

Page 318: ...ata in the Instructions Important On system phones this function is called via the menu phone app optional see manual for the phone Note To use this function at ISDN phones or to delete it again this function must be supported via a function key or via the menu by the respective phone optional see manual for the phone Note Some analogue phones permit this function via the T Net function key menu o...

Page 319: ...dvanced Information V13 06 2019 319 3 Hang up the receiver You are called as soon as the subscriber is available Note A callback will be stored for up to 45 minutes 4 Pick up the receiver to the make the callback If you do not pick up within 20 seconds the callback is deleted ...

Page 320: ...turb If for example a person must absolutely be reached in an emergency despite the do not disturb function the do not disturb function can be circumvented by a priority call from an internal phone If the internal phone you are trying to call is busy because it is set to do not disturb proceed as follows Wait ten seconds The subscriber is now called ...

Page 321: ...uery Call Toggling between Conversations Ending One of the Two Calls Connecting Both Communication Partners Initiating Query Call to Third Subscriber Information on the ChapterInitiating a Query CallEnding a Query CallToggling between ConversationsEnding One of the Two CallsConnecting Both Communication PartnersInitiating Query Call to Third Subscriber ...

Page 322: ...R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 322 Information on the Chapter During a query call you are talking with one subscriber while your previous communication partner is on hold on the PBX in the background listening to hold music ...

Page 323: ...Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Internal number of the door for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Short code number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding T...

Page 324: ...4 Note Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone Note On ISDN and system phones this function is performed via an existing function key or via the menu optional see manual for the phone ...

Page 325: ...scriber called for the query call does not respond Press the Flash key or the Query key and dial 1 You are now reconnected with the person waiting on the other line The subscriber called for the query call is busy Wait You will automatically be reconnected with the communication partner waiting on the other line Note On ISDN and system phones this function is performed via a function key or via th...

Page 326: ...lows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 2 You continue to conduct a query call The other communication partner is now active Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone Note On ISDN and system phones this function is performed via an existing function key or via the menu optional see m...

Page 327: ...llowing steps Press the Flash key or the Query key and dial 1 The current call is disconnected You will then make an one to one call with the communication partner who had previously been on hold Press the Flash key or the Query key and dial 0 The call in the background will be disconnected You will then make an one to one call with the communication partner who had previously been active Note Not...

Page 328: ...et your communication partners speak with each other you can connect them Requirements To connect two external communication partners the following is required Authorisation Transfert d appels externes vers l extérieur assigned to the subscriber During a query call proceed as follows Hang up the receiver Both communication partners are connected with each other ...

Page 329: ...e number Possible entries Internal number of the individual phone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Short code number for exchange line request type Direc...

Page 330: ... then make a query call with the communication partner who had previously been on hold The call with the third communication partner is disconnected To disconnect the previous calls and make an one on one call with the third communication partner press the Flash key or the Query key and dial 0 You are making an one on one call with the third communication partner The previous calls have been disco...

Page 331: ... to Third Subscriber COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 331 Subsequently press the Flash key or the Query key and dial 1 Also use this function to terminate the call to this communication partner ...

Page 332: ...ling a Third Subscriber and Transferring to an Active Communication Partner Parking the Call Internally Call Parking Unparking the Call Call Parking Transferring with AnnouncementBlind Transfer Transferring without Announcement Placing Communication Partner in Waiting LoopCalling a Third Subscriber and Transferring to an Active Communication PartnerParking the Call Internally Call Parking Unparkin...

Page 333: ...hones may ring after hanging up the receiver and you may then be reconnected with your first communication partner after picking up the receiver Use the manual for the phone to check whether the Transfer at a PBX function has been enabled If this has not been done do this subsequently If you want to initiate a new call immediately after the transfer proceed during the query call as follows Both co...

Page 334: ...ees for a transferred call by your network provider Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone Note On some ISDN phones this function can be called via an existing function key or via the menu optional see manual for the phone ...

Page 335: ... follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Enter the internal number Possible entries Internal number of the individual phone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding 3 Wait until you hear the ringtone 4 Hang up the receiver Once the called subscriber accepts...

Page 336: ...sfer Transferring without Announcement COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 336 procedure will already be cancelled after the first 60 seconds and the external call will be disconnected ...

Page 337: ...riber If the internal phone to which you are trying to transfer a call is busy proceed as follows 1 Wait You will automatically be reconnected with the waiting communication partner Note On many ISDN phones the termination of a query call on busy is not performed automatically but via a function key or via the menu optional see manual for the phone 2 Press the Flash key or the Query key 3 Dial 07 ...

Page 338: ...ternal subscriber does not answer the call within 60 seconds or the line remains busy during the three minute waiting time the call will be transferred back to you If you pick up the receiver you will be reconnected with the communication partner You can then place him in the waiting loop again If you do not pick up the call within 60 seconds the connection is disconnected completely for example i...

Page 339: ...r During a query call proceed as follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 5 3 Enter a phone number Possible entries External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Short code number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Internal number of the individual phone for exchange line request type Dire...

Page 340: ... other Then return to conducting an individual call with your first communication partner To connect the second and third communication partner and to terminate the call with the first communication partner hang up the receiver The second and the third communication partner are now connected with each other The first call will be signaled by the PBX if it was an external call The internal call is ...

Page 341: ...Flash key or the Query key 2 Enter the internal base number Possible entries Internal base number for the parking zone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding 3 Dial the number of the park position Possible entries 0 to 9 Note If you hear a busy signal when you dial the park position this position is already in use Pressing the Flash key or the Query key takes you ...

Page 342: ...r internal phone Requirements Authorisation Parçage d appels assigned to the subscriber Parked call 1 Pick up the receiver Note During an existing call press the Flash key or the Query key and dial 06 2 Enter the internal base number Possible entries Internal base number for the parking zone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding 3 Dial the number of the park posi...

Page 343: ...ting Conference Calls Initiating Toggling between Conversations during a Conference Call Connecting Both Conference Call Partners Ending Conference Call Initiating Conference CallsInitiating Toggling between Conversations during a Conference CallConnecting Both Conference Call PartnersEnding Conference Call ...

Page 344: ... a conference call Note If a hands free phone is involved in a conference with 3 internal subscribers echo or singing effects may occur Note You can also use this function on analogue phones where it can be performed via the T Net function key menu optional see manual for the phone Note On ISDN and system phones this function is performed via an existing function key or via the menu optional see m...

Page 345: ...ling or the Query key when using an ISDN phone and dial 2 You then make an individual call with the communication partner who had previously been active The other subscriber of the conference hears the hold music Press the Flash key or the Query key and dial 1 You then make a call with the communication partner who had previously been on hold in the background The other subscriber of the conferenc...

Page 346: ...l that you initiated yourself To connect two external communication partners the following is required Authorisation Transfert d appels externes vers l extérieur assigned to the subscriber During a conference call proceed as follows 1 Press the Flash key or the Query key 2 Dial 4 3 Hang up the receiver Both conference call partners are connected with each other Important To use this function at IS...

Page 347: ... 347 Ending Conference Call If you initiated the conference call yourself you can end the conference call completely Requirements A conference call that you initiated yourself During a conference call proceed as follows Hang up the receiver The conference call is disconnected completely ...

Page 348: ...Time and Date of the PBX Do not Disturb Automatic Reception Baby Call Hotline Call Through Remote Configuration Releasing Remote Configuration Releasing Hook Flash Timing Follow me Call Deblocker Incoming Call Allowance Account Outgoing Calls Call Data Single Call Record Targeted Exchange Line Access Targeted VoIP Access Groups Hotel Functions Identification IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Gateway DHCP C...

Page 349: ...ine RequestCall WaitingTime and Date of the PBX Do not DisturbAutomatic ReceptionBaby Call HotlineCall ThroughRemote Configuration Releasing Hook Flash TimingFollow meCall Deblocker Incoming Call Allowance AccountOutgoing CallsCall Data Single Call Record Targeted Exchange Line AccessTargeted VoIP AccessGroupsHotel FunctionsIdentification IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Gateway DHCP Client InterCom Annou...

Page 350: ...menu of the system phones as well as the menu functions or keys used by individual ISDN phones are not listed see manual for the phone The headlines explain which device may be used for the named character string If the column is limiting the character string e g for starting a conference to analogue phones only it may be available to ISDN phones via menu see manual of the phone Is the function al...

Page 351: ...ains enabled after triggering and another alarm can be triggered Activating an Alarm Once on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 24 Alarm number 1 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Alarm number Alarm number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Additional information Alarm input is disabled after triggering Activating an Alarm Once on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN...

Page 352: ...r for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Additional information Alarm input stays enabled even after triggering Activating an Alarm Always on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 24 Alarm number 2 Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN Scr PIN Alarm number Alarm number Additional information Alarm input stays enabled ...

Page 353: ...ing an Alarm on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 24 Alarm number 0 Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN Scr PIN Alarm number Alarm number Additional information Alarm input is disabled and will not react to triggering Recording an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 563 A PIN Admin or sub admin PIN A 6 9 no 1 4 of the announcement Additional...

Page 354: ...rds the recording is played back for checking Deleting an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 553 A PIN Admin or sub admin PIN A 6 9 no 1 4 of the announcement Deleting an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 573 A PIN Admin or sub admin PIN A 6 9 no 1 4 of the announcement ...

Page 355: ... Reservation of an Exchange Line on Busy on an Internal Phone R 37 R Flash key or Query key Additional information You will hear a confirmation tone Hang up the receiver As soon as a line is available you will be called back by the PBX Pick up the receiver You will hear the external dial tone Dial an external number without an exchange line access number ...

Page 356: ...Information V13 06 2019 356 Force Public Exchange Call for Automatic Exchange Line Request Force Public Exchange Call for Automatic Exchange Line Request 94 Additional information Pick up the receiver Enter an external number Once you have finished dialling the phone number the subscriber will be called ...

Page 357: ...ng Caller on an Analogue Internal Phone R 0 R Query key or Flash key Accepting a Knocking Caller and Disconnecting the Active Call on an Analogue Internal Phone R 1 R Query key or Flash key Accepting a Knocking Caller and Putting the Active Call on Hold on an Analogue Internal Phone R 2 R Query key or Flash key ...

Page 358: ...19 358 Time and Date of the PBX Setting the Time on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 300 hh mm ss PIN Admin or sub admin PIN hh 00 23 hour mm 00 59 minute ss 00 59 second Setting the Date on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 301 dd mm yy PIN Admin or sub admin PIN dd 01 31 day mm 01 12 month yy 00 99 year ...

Page 359: ...Do not Disturb COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 359 Do not Disturb Enabling Do not Disturb on an Internal Phone 8 21 1 Disabling Do not Disturb on an Internal Phone 8 21 0 ...

Page 360: ...he announcement Additional information Wait for trilling tone after 2nd Start recording with 3rd Stop recording with Afterwards the recording is played back for checking Deleting an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 554 A PIN Admin or sub admin PIN A 1 9 0 no 1 10 of the announcement Listening to an Annoucement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 574 A PIN Admin or sub admin PIN A 1 9 0 no 1 10 of th...

Page 361: ...r of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Enabling Baby Call Hotline without Re entering the Number on an Internal Phone 53 Disabling Baby Call Hotline on an Internal Phone 53 Checking Activation on an Internal Phone 53 Additional i...

Page 362: ...hrough Initiating a Call on an External Phone Call Through number Destination number Call Through number External number defined for Call Through on the PBX Destination number Internal or external phone to be called internal number of the group or subscriber or short code dialling number ...

Page 363: ...Configuration Releasing Initiating Releasing Remote Configuration on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 91 PIN Admin sub admin or user PIN Initiating Releasing Remote Configuration on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 91 Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN ARA PIN ...

Page 364: ...Configuration Releasing Initiating Releasing Remote Configuration on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 91 PIN Admin sub admin or user PIN Initiating Releasing Remote Configuration on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 91 Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN ARA PIN ...

Page 365: ...Hook Flash Timing COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 365 Hook Flash Timing Learning the Flash Timing on an Analogue Internal Phone 8 98 R R R Query key or Flash key ...

Page 366: ...stination must be reachable for the subscriber minimum requirement Exchange line authorisation National selected call restrictor under Exchange line settings Liste noire appels sortants business does not restrict the selection of the external destination For configuring Follow me externally Knowledge of the Remote switching number for remote programming and PIN Scr PIN For configuring Follow me ex...

Page 367: ...er for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Destination number Internal or external phone to be called Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Disabling Follow me on Any Internal Phone...

Page 368: ...roup to be redirected Internal number of the group or subscriber Destination number Internal or external phone to be called Internal number of the group or subscriber or External number Additional information After entering the remote switching number wait for external confirmation signal 1 second before continuing DTMF entry Disabling Follow me on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 1...

Page 369: ...tion V13 06 2019 369 Subscriber group number Phone group to be redirected Internal number of the group or subscriber Additional information After entering the remote switching number wait for external confirmation signal 1 second before continuing DTMF entry ...

Page 370: ...4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 370 Call Deblocker Incoming Enabling Call Deblocker Incoming for Subscribers on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 22 1 PIN User PIN Disabling Call Deblocker Incoming for Subscribers on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 22 0 PIN User PIN ...

Page 371: ...e Account of a Subscriber on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 74 Subscriber number E PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Subscriber number Internal number of the individual phone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding E 0 99998 setting the account to a specific amount 200 for example equals EUR 2 20 or 99999 unlimited account ...

Page 372: ... line phone with preceding Initiating an External Call on an Internal Phone Destination number Destination number Internal phone to be called External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Initiating an External Call with Suppressed Number...

Page 373: ... Advanced Information V13 06 2019 373 External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding ...

Page 374: ...act 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 374 Call Data Single Call Record Deleting Own Call Data Records Works Council Function on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 51 PIN User PIN Additional information Authorisation required ...

Page 375: ...be sent Own phone number number without exchange line access number unaffected by a direct exchange line phone or for a PTP connection PBX base number and extnsion number Destination number External phone to be called External number for exchange line request type internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type direct exchange ...

Page 376: ... an Internal Phone Account number Destination number Account number Used VoIP account VoIP Account number for exchange line request types Direct exchange line phone and Automatic exchange line request with preceding Destination number External phone to be called External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number ...

Page 377: ...ceding Logging out of a Group Incoming and Outgoing on an Internal Phone 8 40 0 Group number Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Logging out of All Groups Incoming and Outgoing on an Internal Phone 8 40 0 Logging in to a Group Only Incoming on an Internal Phone 8 41 1 Group number Group number Internal number of the gro...

Page 378: ...equest type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Logging out of All Groups Only Incoming on an Internal Phone 8 41 0 Logging in to a Group Only Outgoing on an Internal Phone 8 42 1 Group number Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Logging out of the Group Only Outgoing on an Internal Phone 8 42 0 Logging All Subscri...

Page 379: ... Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 379 Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Additional information Membership of the group required ...

Page 380: ...n V13 06 2019 380 Hotel Functions Entering the wake up Time for One time wake up internal phone hh mm hh 00 23 hour mm 00 59 minute Deleting the Wake up Time internal phone Setting the Room Status internal phone 99 Z Z 1 room cleaned 2 room not cleaned 3 room blocked ...

Page 381: ...ration Manager of the PBX Configuring the IPv4 Address of the PBX on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 931 E PIN Admin or sub admin PIN E IPv4 address of the PBX 12 digits Querying the IPv4 Address of the PBX on an Internal Phone 8 941 Additional information Display of the IPv4 address of the PBX on the phone display after callback by the PBX Configuring the Subnet Mask of the PBX on an Internal Phone 8 PIN...

Page 382: ...N Admin or sub admin PIN E IPv4 address of the gateway 12 digits Querying the Gateway of the PBX on an Internal Phone 8 943 Additional information Display of the IPv4 address of the gateway on the phone display after callback by the PBX Switching the DHCP Client of the PBX on on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 930 1 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Switching the DHCP Client of the PBX off on an Internal Phone 8...

Page 383: ...Subnet Mask Gateway DHCP Client COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 383 8 940 Additional information Display of the DHCP client status of the PBX on the phone display after callback by the PBX 0 off 1 on ...

Page 384: ...hone 011 Subscriber group number Subscriber group number Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Handsfree Speaking to a System Phone on an Internal Phone 012 Subscriber group number Subscriber group number Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding ...

Page 385: ... Phone R 2 R Query key or Flash key Additional information You are talking to the previously active call partner The other conference partner is hearing music on hold Back to Toggling Between Conversations on an Analogue Internal Phone R 1 R Query key or Flash key Additional information You are talking to the call partner previously held in the background The other conference partner is hearing mu...

Page 386: ...Conference COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 386 R Query key or Flash key ...

Page 387: ...al Phone 8 81 K K 2 to 4 digit ID no of the configuration Additional information Authorisation required Switching the Configuration on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 81 K Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN Scr PIN K 2 to 4 digit ID no of the configuration Additional information Authorisation required ...

Page 388: ...3 06 2019 388 Loudspeaker Announcement Announcement to Announcement Output on an Internal Phone Number of the announcement output Number of the announcement output Internal number of the announcement output for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding ...

Page 389: ...ne 8 PIN 5650 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Additional information Wait for trilling tone after 2nd Start recording with 3rd Stop recording with Afterwards the recording is played back for checking Listening to the Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 5750 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Deleting the Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 5550 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN ...

Page 390: ...irect exchange line phone with preceding P 0 9 no 0 9 of the park position Additional information Authorisation required Picking up a Call Conversation on an Internal Phone Parking number P Number Internal number of the parking zone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding P 0 9 no 0 9 of the park position Additional information Authorisation required Taking over a ...

Page 391: ...nformation V13 06 2019 391 R Query key or Flash key Parking number Internal number of the parking zone for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding P 0 9 no 0 9 of the park position Additional information Authorisation required ...

Page 392: ...subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External telepohone number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Enabling Multi Path Call Forwarding for Subscribers on an Internal Phone 481 Disabling Multi P...

Page 393: ...pe Direct exchange line phone with preceding Destination number Internal or external phone to be called Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exch...

Page 394: ...ath Call Forwarding for Groups on an Internal Group Phone 97 Group number 481 Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Additional information Membership of the group required Checking Activation Group on an Internal Phone 97 Group number 481 Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exch...

Page 395: ...5 Pick up and Call Take over Taking over a Call Conversation on an Internal Phone 06 Subscriber group number Subscriber group number Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Additional information Authorisation required ...

Page 396: ...IN Old PIN to be changed Admin sub admin user or ARA PIN 2nd PIN New PIN Admin sub admin user or ARA PIN 3rd PIN New PIN Admin sub admin user or ARA PIN Note If at the end you hear a busy signal instead of a confirmation tone the new PIN may already be in use in the PBX and no change takes place Re attempt with another digit sequence ...

Page 397: ...line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Initiating an External Call with Private Exchange Line Access without PIN on Own Internal Phone 91 Destination number Destination number External phone to be called External number for exchange line request type Internal ...

Page 398: ...Private Personalised Exchange Line Access COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 398 Additional information Only on own phone Authorisation required ...

Page 399: ...ssigned Project on an Internal Phone 93 P Destination number P 2 to 6 digit project no Destination number External phone to be called External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding ...

Page 400: ...light door opener alarm and PC relay Authorisation required Switching a Relay on Switches off Automatically after Configured Switching Duration on an External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 26 R Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN Scr PIN R 2 to 4 digit ID no of the relay Additional information For relays with the operating modes light door opener alarm ...

Page 401: ...hing number 8 PIN 26 R 1 Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN Scr PIN R 2 to 4 digit ID no of the relay Additional information For relays with the operating modes manual relay configuration dependent and automatic configuration switchover Authorisation required Switching a Relay off on an Internal Phone 8 26 R 0 R 2 to 4 digit ID no of the relay Additional inf...

Page 402: ...External Phone Remote switching number 8 PIN 26 R 0 Remote switching number Remote switching number for remote programming PIN Scr PIN R 2 to 4 digit ID no of the relay Additional information For relays with the operating modes manual relay configuration dependent and automatic configuration switchover Authorisation required ...

Page 403: ... for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Disconnecting the 3rd Call and Returning to the Last Active Call on an Analogue Internal Phone R 1 R Query key or F...

Page 404: ...4 R Query key or Flash key Connecting 2nd and 3rd Call Partner and Continuing to Talk to the 1st Call Partner on an Analogue Internal Phone R 4 R Query key or Flash key Continuing the 3rd Call and Disconnecting the Other Calls on an Analogue Internal Phone R 0 R Query key or Flash key ...

Page 405: ...r subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Cancelling a Ringing Call on an Analogue Internal Phone R 1 R Query key or Flash key Splitting on an An...

Page 406: ... R 0 R Query key or Flash key Disconnecting the Active Call and Returning to the Call Partner on Hold on an Analogue Internal Phone R 1 R Query key or Flash key Connecting Both Call Partners on an Analogue Internal Phone R 4 R Query key or Flash key Transferring a Call Partner into Waiting Loop on Busy on an Analogue Internal Phone R 07 R Query key or Flash key ...

Page 407: ...y COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 407 Callback on Busy Initiating Callback on Busy on an Internal Phone R 37 R Query key or Flash key Cancelling Callback on Busy on an Internal Phone 37 ...

Page 408: ...OMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 408 Callback on No Reply Initiating Callback on No Reply on an Internal Phone R 37 R Query keyor Flash key Cancelling Callback on No Reply on an Internal Phone 37 ...

Page 409: ... if call forwarding is to be configured for the number currently sent by the phone Destination number External phone to be called External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Additional information Authorisation required Authorisation for external destination required Permanent configuration is enabled Enabling Unconditional Call Forwardi...

Page 410: ...Internal Phone 96 Own number 21 Own number Own phone number number without exchange line access number unaffected by a direct exchange line phone The number can be omitted if call forwarding is to be configured for the number currently sent by the phone Additional information Authorisation required The destination number may only be an external number Permanent configuration is enabled Configuring...

Page 411: ...d Authorisation for external destination required Permanent configuration is enabled Enabling Call Forwarding on Busy without Re entering the Number on an Internal Phone 96 Own number 67 Own number Own phone number number without exchange line access number unaffected by a direct exchange line phone The number can be omitted if call forwarding is to be configured for the number currently sent by t...

Page 412: ...ent configuration is enabled Configuring Call Forwarding on No Reply on an Internal Phone 96 Own number 61 Destination number Own number Own phone number number without exchange line access number unaffected by a direct exchange line phone The 1st number can be omitted if call forwarding is to be configured for the number currently sent by the phone Destination number External number to be called ...

Page 413: ...mber currently sent by the phone Additional information Authorisation required The destination number may only be an external number Permanent configuration is enabled Disabling Call Forwarding on No Reply on an Internal Phone 96 Own number 61 Own number Own phone number number without exchange line access number unaffected by a direct exchange line phone The number can be omitted if call forwardi...

Page 414: ... Dialling Phone on an Internal Phone 96 69 Additional information Permanent configuration is disabled Enabling Time Control for a Special Phone Number on an Internal Phone 96 Own number 69 Own number Own phone number number without exchange line access number unaffected by a direct exchange line phone Additional information Permanent configuration is disabled ...

Page 415: ...up as outgoing Subscriber group number Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Additional information Authorisation for external destination required Authorisation and membership of the group necessary Enabling Uncon...

Page 416: ...line phone with preceding The number can be omitted if the phone is logged in to the group as outgoing Additional information Authorisation and membership of the group required Configuring Call Forwarding on Busy on an Internal Phone 97 Group number 67 Subscriber group number Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding The 1st ...

Page 417: ... number 67 Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding The number can be omitted if the phone is logged in to the group as outgoing Additional information Authorisation and membership of the group required Disabling Call Forwarding on Busy on an Internal Phone 97 Group number 67 Group number Internal number of the group for exc...

Page 418: ...er of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Additional information Authorisation for external destination required Authorisation and membership of the group required Enabling Call Forwarding on No Reply without Re entering the Number...

Page 419: ...oup required Disabling Call Forwarding on No Reply on an Internal Phone 97 Group number 61 Group number Internal number of the group for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding The number can be omitted if the phone is logged in to the group as outgoing Additional information Authorisation and membership of the group required ...

Page 420: ...p or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request type Internal phone with preceding exchange line access number Additional information Authorisation for external destination required Enabling Unconditional Call Forwarding without Re entering the Number on an Internal Phone 21 Disabling Unconditional Call Forwardin...

Page 421: ...xchange line access number Additional information Authorisation for external destination required Enabling Call Forwarding on Busy without Re entering the Number on an Internal Phone 67 Disabling Call Forwarding on Busy on an Internal Phone 67 Configuring Call Forwarding on No Reply on an Internal Phone 61 Destination number Number Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line reque...

Page 422: ... Advanced Information V13 06 2019 422 Additional information Authorisation for external destination required Enabling Call Forwarding on No Reply without Re entering the Number on an Internal Phone 61 Disabling Call Forwarding on No Reply on an Internal Phone 61 ...

Page 423: ...vanced Information V13 06 2019 423 Call Restrictor Incoming Enabling the Call Restrictor Incoming for Subscribers on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 23 1 PIN User PIN Disabling the Call Restrictor Incoming for Subscribers on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 23 0 PIN User PIN ...

Page 424: ...no 1 10 of the announcment Zusatzinformationen Wait for trilling tone after 2nd Start recording with 3rd Stop recording with Afterwards the recording is played back for checking Deleting an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 55 AA PIN Admin or sub admin PIN AA 01 10 no 1 10 of the announcment Listening to an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 57 AA PIN Admin or sub admin PIN AA 01 10 no ...

Page 425: ...ceding Opening a Door on an Internal Phone R R Query key or Flash key Additional information Authorisation required Initiating a Query Call from a Door Call on an Analogue Internal Phone R Door number R Query key or Flash key Door number Internal number of the group or subscriber for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding or External number for exchange line request t...

Page 426: ...Door Functions COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 426 or Short code dialling number for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding ...

Page 427: ... Time Control for Readiness on an Internal Phone If the Internal Phone Is the Owner of the Voice Mailbox 8 28 9 Recording an Announcement for a Voice Mailbox with a Phone on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 566 A Voice mailbox number PIN Admin sub admin or user PIN A 1 9 0 no 1 10 of the announcement Voice mailbox number Internal number of the voice mailbox for exchange line request type Direct exchange li...

Page 428: ...ternal number of the voice mailbox for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with preceding Deleting the Announcement for a Voice Mailbox on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 556 A Voice mailbox number PIN Admin sub admin or user PIN A 1 9 0 no 1 10 of the announcement Voice mailbox number Internal number of the voice mailbox for exchange line request type Direct exchange line phone with pre...

Page 429: ... 5 Repeats the message currently being played back 6 Jumps to the next message 7 Deletes the message currently being played back 8 Ends playback 10 Disables the voice mailbox 11 Enables the voice mailbox 20 Enables recording and changing announcements Note The default announcement and your own announcements if any have been recorded will be played back The following functions are available while y...

Page 430: ...e function F 30 Disables message forwarding 31 Enables message forwarding 70 Deletes all messages and voice memos 99 Records a voice memo Hang up Ends remote access Additional function while a message is being replayed 9 Announces the phone number of the caller provided it has been transferred Further options after announcement of the phone number Initiates a callback Back to the message playback ...

Page 431: ... or remote access PIN F 0 Opens the Help menu 1 Opens the main menu 2 Plays back new messages 3 Plays back all of the messages 4 Jumps back to the previous message 5 Repeats the message currently being played back 6 Jumps to the next message 7 Deletes the message currently being played back 8 Ends playback 10 Disables the voice mailbox 11 Enables the voice mailbox 20 Enables recording and changing...

Page 432: ...rently heard or free announcement for changing or recording Press to save your announcement or to cancel the function F 30 Disables message forwarding 31 Enables message forwarding 70 Deletes all messages and voice memos 99 Records a voice memo Hang up Ends remote access Additional function while a message is being replayed 9 Announces the phone number of the caller provided it has been transferre...

Page 433: ...oice mailbox number PIN F Voice mailbox number External number of the voice mailbox or External number of the phone which is owner user of the voice mailbox PIN User or remote access PIN F 0 Opens the Help menu 1 Opens the main menu 2 Plays back new messages 3 Plays back all of the messages 4 Jumps back to the previous message 5 Repeats the message currently being played back 6 Jumps to the next m...

Page 434: ...the currently heard announcement as active announcement Note 4 Jumps to the previous announcement Note 5 Repeats the announcement you have just heard Note 6 Jumps to the next announcement Note 7 Selects the currently heard or free announcement for changing or recording Press to save your announcement or to cancel the function F 30 Disables message forwarding 31 Enables message forwarding 70 Delete...

Page 435: ...ing played After having pressed wait until the announcement has ended Remote Access on an External Phone If Readiness of the Voice Mailbox Is Disabled Voice mailbox number PIN F Voice mailbox number External number of the voice mailbox or External number of the phone which is owner user of the voice mailbox PIN User or remote access PIN F 0 Opens the Help menu 1 Opens the main menu 2 Plays back ne...

Page 436: ... played back The following functions are available while your own announcements are being played back Note Selects the currently heard announcement as active announcement Note 4 Jumps to the previous announcement Note 5 Repeats the announcement you have just heard Note 6 Jumps to the next announcement Note 7 Selects the currently heard or free announcement for changing or recording Press to save y...

Page 437: ...ces the phone number of the caller provided it has been transferred Further options after announcement of the phone number Initiates a callback Back to the message playback Additional information After having dialled the inter number press while the announcement is being played The voice mailbox accepts the call after up to 55 seconds After having pressed wait until the announcement has ended ...

Page 438: ...Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 5631 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Additional information Wait for trilling tone after 2nd Start recording with 3rd Stop recording with Deleting the Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 5531 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Switching Music on Hold and Announcement on off and Listen to It on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 573 Option PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Option 0 no ...

Page 439: ... COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 439 1 announcement only 2 internal music on hold only 3 internal music on hold and announcement 4 external music on hold only 5 external music on hold and announcement ...

Page 440: ...ne 8 PIN 31 hh mm w PIN User PIN hh 00 23 hour mm 00 59 minute w 1 7 single weekday Mon Sun 8 weekend Sat and Sun 9 working days Mon to Fri 0 whole week Mon to Sun Entering the wake up Time and Activating Repetitive wake up on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 32 hh mm w PIN User PIN hh 00 23 hour mm 00 59 minute w 1 7 single weekday Mon Sun 8 weekend Sat and Sun 9 working days Mon to Fri ...

Page 441: ...of All Subscribers on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 34 PIN Admin or sub admin PIN Recording an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 562 A PIN Admin or sub admin PIN A 1 3 no 1 3 of the announcement Additional information Wait for trilling tone after 2nd Start recording with 3rd Stop recording with Afterwards the recording is played back for checking Deleting an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN...

Page 442: ...OMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 442 A 1 3 no 1 3 of the announcement Listening to an Announcement on an Internal Phone 8 PIN 572 A PIN Admin or sub admin PIN A 1 3 no 1 3 of the announcement ...

Page 443: ...réseau Dealer and operator data Configuration du port Basich Settings Réseaux publics Abonné Acheminement des appels Sauvegarde de données Affichage et impression Fin Basic KnowledgeLangueConfiguration réseauDealer and operator dataConfiguration du portBasich SettingsRéseaux publicsAbonnéAcheminement des appelsSauvegarde de donnéesAffichage et impressionFin ...

Page 444: ...d as soon as another page is opened Note Changes in the network configuration are saved but not activated until you leave the configuration wizrad via Fin or Opening closing the Configuration Wizard Requirements Logged in to the PBX as an administrator Opens or closes the configuration wizard Navigating in the Configuration Wizard Opens the next or previous page Note Configuration du port to Fin a...

Page 445: ...Langue COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 445 Langue Proceed as follows Using the configuration wizard Langue Language selection Suivant ...

Page 446: ...Configuration réseau COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 446 Configuration réseau Configuration Ethernet Configuration DNS Configuration EthernetConfiguration DNS ...

Page 447: ...manually Requirements Disabled DHCP client Adresse IP IPv4 address in the range 0 255 example 192 168 0 240 Reprendre immédiatement The IPv4 address is immediately applied and the PBX is routed to the new IPv4 address Renewed registration required Reprendre en cas de redémarrage The IPv4 address is not applied until the next time the PBX is restarted Masque de sous réseau IPv4 address of the subne...

Page 448: ...can be reached via the IP address 169 254 1 240 if it is directly connected to an individual computer which automatically receives its IP address it is connected to a router that automatically assigns IP addresses Utiliser votre propre serveur DNS Requirements DHCP enabled Despite the enabled DHCP client the DNS server set here is used Note When switched off the PBX receives the DNS server address...

Page 449: ...Dealer and operator data COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 449 Dealer and operator data Accès administrateur Données du système Accès administrateurDonnées du système ...

Page 450: ...or registration on the PBX Note Changes at the administrator access are only possible with an encrypted HTTPS connection Note After a change a new regisration is required Nom d utilisateur admin Consists of up to 32 characters containing digits letters upper and lower case but no umlauts and ß Modifier le PIN admin Enables the input option 6 characters digits for PIN admin and PIN admin confirmati...

Page 451: ... bar under the entry field shows the security level of the password red low level green high level Note Passwords with a low security level cannot be saved Caution A high level does not necessarily indicate a secure password as this can also be reached by entering names and birth dates in connection with special characters However names and birth dates should not be used as passwords To create a s...

Page 452: ...e required Acheter code d activation de bon d achat Shop online Button to open the online shop Acheter code d activation de bon d achat Entry field for an unblocking code for system activation Important The steps Configuration du port to Fin of the configuration wizard and the button Suivant are only available if an unblocking code voucher code has been entered Fonctionnement du système dans le pa...

Page 453: ... preset in this way cannot be deleted You can only preset different public emergency numbers by subsequently changing the country settings Note Make sure that there are no conflicts between country specific emergency numbers and your internal phone numbering plan Assign new internal phone numbers if necessary ...

Page 454: ...tion that the network provider has provided for the NT needs to be configured for the external S 0 port Note No selection of the connection type is possible for internal S 0 ports They are fixed on PTMP connection Liasion Point Multi Point PMP ISDN PTMP connection Point to Multipoint with up to 10 multiple subscriber numbers MSNs Connexion PTP ISDN PTP connection Point to Point with a PBX base num...

Page 455: ...pact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 455 Basich Settings Exchange Line Request Exchange Line Access Number Indicatifs régionaux Exchange Line Request Exchange Line Access NumberIndicatifs régionaux ...

Page 456: ...uence and the adjustment of the dialled phone number with the internal numbering plan Important After a firmware update from an older firmware version to version 6 6 the system wide automatic exchange line request is at first switched off If the system wide automatic exchange line request is switched on you must note the following for the conversion of the existing phones Note COMfortel 600 For al...

Page 457: ...ternal line exception direct exchange access and automatic exchange line request Note An available external line is indicated by the external dial tone after the exchange line access number has been dialled The external number can then be dialled Note The factory setting for the exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 This number is not effective at first because automatic exchange line reques...

Page 458: ...n this way cannot be deleted You can only preset different public emergency numbers by subsequently changing the country settings Note Make sure that there are no conflicts between country specific emergency numbers and your internal phone numbering plan Assign new internal phone numbers if necessary Indicatif international International phone prefix e g 0044 for the UK These are necessary for som...

Page 459: ...s also applies to the location at which the PBX is installed you do not need to enter an area code Niveau de sélection The selection of the dial level Location National International is country specific Depending on the country and the settings for the local area code above a dial level must be selected example In Belgium local area codes do not exist Here the dial level Localité must not be selec...

Page 460: ...rovider assigns the phone numbers for the connection Select Nouveau to enter Nom For display purposes on the system phone Sonnerie The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal external calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences Numéro de téléphone du système A PTP connection has a PBX base numb...

Page 461: ... g 0 to 99 as is usually the case and as a digit in the set number of places in extension numbers e g 00 to 99 Note If linear call distribution for the PTP connection is enabled Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels page and if the internal numbers match the external extension numbers the system automatically performs a 1 1 assignment for the extension numbers in the extensions block If an exten...

Page 462: ...s 0 the fallback call distribution function is enabled as soon as the time for selecting a suffix dialling digit has passed Note You must enter all the extension numbers for a PTP connection that is not running linear call distribution Indicatif international International phone prefix e g 0044 for the UK for which the account s VoIP provider has provided the phone numbers Note Land line connectio...

Page 463: ... that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note that changing the exchange line access number restricts the phone numbering plan Nom d utilisateur User name assigned by the VoIP provider ...

Page 464: ...igned by the VoIP provider when the account was set up It is used to verify the user name Note To change an existing password click on Show passwords Note Note that some providers allocate both login information for the web page and separate login information for using the Voice over IP service e g a dial in password Find out what information is needed for the dial in and enter it accordingly Note...

Page 465: ...click on Attribuer les mots de passe Le compte peut passer des appels d urgence Requirements VoIP provider has authorised and switched on emergency call ability This account allows emergency calls to be made Note When switched off this account cannot be used for emergency calls When you attempt to dial an emergency number you will hear the announcement This phone does not allow emergency calls Ple...

Page 466: ...Réseaux publics COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 466 The password is visible and can be changed ...

Page 467: ...numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note that changing the exchange line acces...

Page 468: ... the connected end device Analogue end devices Téléphone analogue phone analogue modem Répondeur analogue answering machine Fax analogue fax machine Interphone analogue door terminal selection deletes the subscriber and opens Périphériques Assistant de périphériques for configuration of a door terminal Interface de paging analogue announcement output selection deletes the subscriber and opens Péri...

Page 469: ...n a COMfortel DECT 900 Base Fax ISDN fax machine in compliance with the Euro ISDN Standard DSS1 VoIP end devices COMfortel IP COMfortel 1400 IP COMfortel 2600 IP COMfortel 3200 COMfortel 3500 COMfortel 3600 IP COMfortel 1200 IP COMfortel 1200 IP VoIP COMfortel 2500 AB COMfortel VoIP 2500 AB Téléphone VoIP par défaut Standard VoIP end device SIP from other manufacturers soft phone SIP Combiné pour ...

Page 470: ...VoIP device types COMfortel IP and Téléphone VoIP par défaut you can already assign the MAC address and a provisioning file to the subscriber you can configure the provisioning file using the page Abonnés Abo Provisioning d IP Gestion des fichiers Note For the new subscriber PINs and passwords will be automatically generated you can change them using the page Abonnés Abo Propriétés The following p...

Page 471: ...ternal number The caller will be transferred to the selected internal number subscriber group voice mail fax box or automatic reception Note External numbers e g those used as remote switching programming numbers or call through numbers may not be used in the call distribution ISDN PTP connections VoIP PTP connections No de téléphone interne Nom For a PTP connection without linear call distributio...

Page 472: ... hears the busy signal Internal number The caller will be transferred to the selected internal number subscriber group voice mail fax box or automatic reception Note External numbers e g those used as remote switching programming numbers or call through numbers may not be used in the call distribution Analogue No de téléphone interne Nom Internal number The caller will be transferred to the select...

Page 473: ...arde de données COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 473 Sauvegarde de données Lire les données de configuration depuis le système Lire les données de configuration depuis le système ...

Page 474: ...ration file that was created with an older firmware version may possibly not contain all of the configuration data for example data for new functions that were added by a firmware update Select and import a configuration file cfg that is stored on a PC data storage device Reprendre les données de configuration cannot be edited Reprendre les paramètres réseau Reprendre les données du système Repren...

Page 475: ...ta sets with destination source and time information of a telecommunication connection Note Before the data backup is being saved all subscribers to the PBX must be informed that these contents will be forwarded They must also be informed about who will use the data received Note It is absolutely necessary to store the data safely and in accordance with the legal requirements Note If you want to m...

Page 476: ...pression COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 476 Affichage et impression Proceed as follows Using the configuration wizard Affichage et impression Documents imprimés All entries are printed ...

Page 477: ...ware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 477 Fin Proceed as follows Using the configuration wizard Fin Leaving the configuration wizard or alternatively via Note When leaving via changes on the current page are not adopted ...

Page 478: ...ger COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 478 Configuration Manager Introduction to the Configuration Manager Synthèses Surveillance Introduction to the Configuration ManagerSynthèsesSurveillance ...

Page 479: ...79 Introduction to the Configuration Manager Requirements and Notes Opening the Configuration Manager Operating Instructions for the Configuration Manager Information on the PBX Requirements and NotesOpening the Configuration ManagerOperating Instructions for the Configuration ManagerInformation on the PBX ...

Page 480: ...ress on the PBX Configured password Note Every login is logged page Surveillance Messages système Additionally this information can be sent as a system e mail page Administration Messages système Note After the third failed login attempt for a minute it is not possible to log in This blocking period will be increased after another three failed login attempts Note Since the administrator may block ...

Page 481: ...Configuration Manager Open the Configuration Manager as an Administrator Opening the Configuration Manager as Sub Administrator Opening the Configuration Manager as User Open the Configuration Manager as an AdministratorOpening the Configuration Manager as Sub AdministratorOpening the Configuration Manager as User ...

Page 482: ...strator COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 482 Open the Configuration Manager as an Administrator 1 Enter the IP address of the PBX for example 192 168 0 240 2 Enter the admin user name and the corresponding password ...

Page 483: ...e Configuration Manager as Sub Administrator 1 Enter the IP address of the PBX for example 192 168 0 240 2 Enter the user name sub admin and the corresponding password Note If the sub administrator enters his own internal number as his user name this login is recognised as a user login and the web interface is displayed for the user ...

Page 484: ...act 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 484 Opening the Configuration Manager as User 1 Enter the IP address of the PBX for example 192 168 0 240 2 Enter the internal number of the user as user name and the corresponding password ...

Page 485: ...9 485 Operating Instructions for the Configuration Manager Configuration Manager Navigation Logging Out Entry and Selection Fields Creating Deleting Searching for and Sorting Table Entries Configuration Manager NavigationLogging OutEntry and Selection FieldsCreating Deleting Searching for and Sorting Table Entries ...

Page 486: ...e and opened at the corresponding location Area navigation The available areas are displayed in a tree under Navigation Most of the themes have been summarised under a main theme and are listed in the order in which to work If you skip a theme it may happen that the next page is not available e g because no subscribers with internal numbers have been configured yet Area help topics Below Navigatio...

Page 487: ...Logging Out COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 487 Logging Out Via the Logout link in the upper area of the Configuration Manager you go back directly to the login page ...

Page 488: ...d normally indicates that a name or number must be entered Selection fields offer settings that are possible for this function Some functions offer radio buttons for adjustments The activation of an adjustement causes the simultaneous deactivation of all other selection options A check box indicates the enabling or disabling of a function Slider for making a setting Sometimes the exact values are ...

Page 489: ...r the required range in the de and À entry fields and then click Enregistrer Note In extendible lists the lower toolbar displays information about the actual and maximum possible number of entries in the table Dongle functions identified by have three numbers In this case the second number is the active number and the third is the maximum number that can be enabled via the dongle Deleting entries ...

Page 490: ...ble Entries COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 490 Sorting entries Click a column header Sorted in ascending order Sorted in descending order Note If no arrow appears then the column cannot be used as a sorting criteria ...

Page 491: ...n the PBX Click the logo in the Configuration Manager for opening the information about the PBX e g firmware version serial number dealer and operator data Note The dealer and operator data can be edited under Administration Dealer and operator data Documents imprimés Prints the information about the PBX ...

Page 492: ...plémentaires Standard automatiques SVI Fonction de messagerie vocale télécopie Heures de réveil Plages horaires Ports Plan de répartition des numéros Plan de répartition des numéros d identificationAcheminement des appelsStatut transferts d appelsGroupesMots de passe abonné supplémentairesStandard automatiques SVIFonction de messagerie vocale télécopieHeures de réveilPlages horairesPortsPlan de ré...

Page 493: ...9 493 Plan de répartition des numéros d identification Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Plan de répartition des numéros d identification Displays all assigned identification numbers sorted by number name or type Documents imprimés Prints a list of all assigned identification numbers ...

Page 494: ... 06 2019 494 Acheminement des appels Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Acheminement des appels Displays on which internal subscribers a call on a separate external number is signalled Documents imprimés Prints a list of the configured call distributions ...

Page 495: ...configuration dependent status of call forwardings for all configured subscribers and groups Numéro de téléphone Nom Displays all available subscribers and groups Numéro de téléphone composé Displays the configuration dependent phone numbers of the configured mutli path call forwardings Note An activated multi path call forwarding is highlighted in green Documents imprimés Prints a list of the con...

Page 496: ...on V13 06 2019 496 Groupes Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Groupes Displays all created groups with corresponding phone numbers and names as well as the subscriber status Documents imprimés Prints a list of all configured groups ...

Page 497: ...asse abonné supplémentaires Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Mots de passe abonné supplémentaires Displays all configured additional subscriber passwords for the Configuration Manager API and Action URLs Documents imprimés Prints a list of the configured additional subscriber passwords ...

Page 498: ...06 2019 498 Standard automatiques SVI Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Standard automatiques SVI Displays all configured automatic receptions and the corresponding destination numbers Documents imprimés Prints a list of all configures automatic receptions ...

Page 499: ...e télécopie Displays all created voice mail and fax boxes Type Voice mail or fax box Numéro de téléphone Nom Number and name of the voice mail fax box Nombre de messages Number of the stored and the maximum possible messages capacité mémoire Value of the actaual occupied and maximun possible storage space Documents imprimés Prints a list of the configured Voice mail and fax boxes Graphique Display...

Page 500: ...vanced Information V13 06 2019 500 Heures de réveil Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Heures de réveil Displays all configured wake up times sorted by weekdays Documents imprimés Prints a list of the configured wake up times ...

Page 501: ...A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 501 Plages horaires Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Plages horaires Displays the time periods the configurations are valid 12 a m 11 59 p m as well as manually enabled configurations ...

Page 502: ...formation V13 06 2019 502 Ports Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Synthèses Ports Displays all configured and fixed ports of the PBX and the used transport protocols Documents imprimés Prints a list of the configured and fixed ports ...

Page 503: ... internal numbering plan Subscriber phone numbers Group numbers Voice mailbox numbers Fax box numbers Phone numbers for door terminals and audio outputs Short code dialling numbers Emergency call and service numbers Exchange line access numbers account numbers for VoIP accounts Exchange line access number of the PBX Automatic receptions Call parking Internal CAPI dial in number Short code macros T...

Page 504: ... last position is needed for the function e g door terminal numbers phone numbers for call parking Note The exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings however this can be changed Réseaux publics Indicatif Note that changing the exchange line access number restricts the phone numbering plan Note The overview can be viewed and printed Documents imprimés in the Configuration ...

Page 505: ...ation ext Canaux de communication Statut comptes VoIP Statut abonnés internes Statut relais IP Messages système Flux de données réseau Messages d état Diagnostic réseauAffectation ext Canaux de communicationStatut comptes VoIPStatut abonnés internesStatut relais IPMessages systèmeFlux de données réseauMessages d état ...

Page 506: ...vanced Information V13 06 2019 506 Diagnostic réseau Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Surveillance Diagnostic réseau When sending a ping to a remote host e g computer PBX in the network its reachability and the routing time is checked ...

Page 507: ...ng the Configuration Manager Surveillance Affectation ext Canaux de communication Displays the status of the external call channels and if a GSM gateway has been connected to the external port Note When opening the page it first shows the status which is automatically updated every 30 seconds available used not available emergency call ability no emergency call ability ...

Page 508: ...unt Réseaux publics VoIP Comptes It is displayed Demande STUN Enregistrement dernier appel sortant Note When opening the page it first shows the status which is automatically updated every 30 seconds The first steps are the DNS request and an evaluation of the DNS server response Registration in progress Registration successful Error for example caused by PBX not connected cable not plugged or def...

Page 509: ...affic with the SIP transport protocol No STUN server entered for the VoIP provider Error for example caused by STUN server offline Faulty STUN server IP address URL Provider specified port not specified STUN server reports faulty responses Firewall blocks SIP transport protocol or otherwise does not allow Voice over IP Enregistrement REGISTER request successful Faulty STUN request Current status m...

Page 510: ...ntication ID VoIP provider blocks multi registrations caused by multiple restarts of the PBX in a too short time dernier appel sortant INVITE request was answered by the VoIP provider Note The logical status is displayed e g an INVITE request to the provider with the answer 404 Not Found unknown phone number is considered as successful unclear e g caused by No call has been made via this account y...

Page 511: ...tes VoIP COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 511 Faulty account data check user name password and authentication ID Outbound proxy currently inactive e g maintenance work Account blocked ...

Page 512: ...status when the page is opened and will automatically be updated every 30 seconds Note Not all status information can be updated automatically see following sections Status analogue phones Unknown analogue phone Connected analogue phone with date of last activity time Note After connecting an analogue phone the receiver must be picked up for correctly displaying the phone status The monitoring pag...

Page 513: ...must either be picked up or the phone must be called for correctly displaying the phone status The monitoring page should then be updated Note The PBX cannot automatically recognize the removal of a device It s hardware status can be reset under Abonné Propriétés Paramètres de base Réinitialiser le statut du matériel Registration VoIP phones No registration Successful encrypted registration of the...

Page 514: ...ess is not possible System standard phone VoIP and ISDN phones The device was registered as system phone on the PBX Distributing firmware VoIP system phones Distributing firmware is enabled in the phone however currently inactive Either no firmware file is saved in the phone or the PBX has determinded another phone of the phone family as firmware distributing phone Firmware distributing phone Subs...

Page 515: ...r processing Not assigned Under Non affecté the phones that are known to the PBX but not assigned to a subscriber or a door terminal are displayed Requirements for automatic assignment Analogue phones Slot and port of the device must correspond to the subscriber ISDN phones MSN slot and port of the device must correspond to the subscriber VoIP phones The MAC address entered for the subscriber must...

Page 516: ...eed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Surveillance Statut relais IP Displays information about the switching status of the IP relays Note When opening the page it first shows the status which is automatically updated every 30 seconds However not all status information can be automatically updated ...

Page 517: ...yed in chronological order with the date and time category Filtre sélectionné and detailled information in English Note The page is not updated automatically Note When the maximum number of entries is exceeded old entries in the same category are automatically deleted Note If you update your firmware from Version 6 4 to 6 6 old log files are grouped to form a tar archive in the SFTP range Document...

Page 518: ...ction data sets with destination source and time information of a telecommunication connection The spoken word of both ends of a telecommunication connection Configuration data of the PBX and connected phones as well as the corresponding PINs and passwords Important Before any recording all participants in the telecommunication connection must be informed that these contents will be recorded and m...

Page 519: ...ker in the browser or defined exception rule 1 Open the page Surveillance Flux de données réseau 2 Accept the legal notes by entering ok in the entry field 3 Click Démarrer la trace 4 If the error can be reproduced easily try to repeat it now 5 To stop the recording of the network log click Arrêter la trace 6 Save the file ...

Page 520: ...Surveillance Messages d état Displays and describes those errors in the PBX that can be corrected via the Configuration Manager or in the hardware Note If an error occurs the status messages appear directly after you log into the Configuration Manager Note When opening the page it first shows the status which is automatically updated every 30 seconds ...

Page 521: ... 2019 521 Settings Configuration Manager Matériel Réseaux publics Abonnés Abo Groupes Périphériques Calendriers Routage Fonctions Données des utilisateurs Administration MatérielRéseaux publicsAbonnés Abo GroupesPériphériquesCalendriersRoutageFonctionsDonnées des utilisateursAdministration ...

Page 522: ...Matériel COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 522 Matériel Sélection des modules Configuration du port Sélection des modulesConfiguration du port ...

Page 523: ...Sélection des modules COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 523 Sélection des modules Settings of the Modules Settings of the Modules ...

Page 524: ...ual hard ware configurations of your PBX If this is the case the settings will be marked in black If it is not the case the settings will be marked in red Note If an inserted module should not be used select the option non affecté in the corresponding list field Configuration Select the modules that are inserted in the corresponding slot Déplacer Moves a module to another slot The settings already...

Page 525: ...Configuration du port COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 525 Configuration du port Settings of the Ports Settings of the Ports ...

Page 526: ...Settings of the Ports COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 526 Settings of the Ports 2BRI 2FXO 2BRI2FXO ...

Page 527: ...ed the module is selected but not inserted Note The numbers under Port correspond to the numbers used on the board Utilisation Set the use of the ISDN ports libre Port is not used and port is not taken into account for the calculation of the total number of existing ports call channels internal S0 Port is used as internal S0 port internal UP0 Port is used as internal UP0 port externe Port is used ...

Page 528: ...eeds to be configured for the external S 0 port Note No selection of the connection type is possible for internal S 0 ports They are fixed on PTMP connection Liasion Point Multi Point PMP ISDN PTMP connection Point to Multipoint with up to 10 multiple subscriber numbers MSNs Connexion PTP ISDN PTP connection Point to Point with a PBX base number and Direct Dial In numbers DDI numbers ...

Page 529: ...selected but not inserted Note The numbers under Port correspond to the numbers used on the board Requirements Selected COMpact 2FXO module Utilisation Set the use for the external analogue ports libre Port is not used and port is not taken into account for the calculation of the total number of existing ports call channels externe Port is used as external port Configurer Opens the page Connexion ...

Page 530: ...ware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 530 Réseaux publics Indicatif Appels d urgence Analogique RNIS VoIP Acheminement des appels Transfert d appel IndicatifAppels d urgenceAnalogiqueRNISVoIPAcheminement des appelsTransfert d appel ...

Page 531: ...Indicatif COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 531 Indicatif Settings of the Exchange Line Request Settings of the Exchange Line Request ...

Page 532: ... 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 532 Settings of the Exchange Line Request Exchange Line Request Exchange Line Access Number Prefixes Signalling Tones Exchange Line Request Exchange Line Access NumberPrefixesSignalling Tones ...

Page 533: ...anager on the following pages Réseaux publics Appels d urgence The PBX automatically distinguishes for each subscriber between internal and external numbers by analysing the digit sequence and the adjustment of the dialled phone number with the internal numbering plan Important After a firmware update from an older firmware version to version 6 6 the system wide automatic exchange line request is ...

Page 534: ...er Code d accès à la ligne principale Requirements Configured prefixes country prefix and local area code Automatic exchange line request disabled Is required to request an external line exception direct exchange access and automatic exchange line request Note An available external line is indicated by the external dial tone after the exchange line access number has been dialled The external numbe...

Page 535: ...hange Line Request Exchange Line Access Number COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 535 Note Note that changing the exchange line access number restricts the phone numbering plan ...

Page 536: ...quired in the selected country e g settings for analogue ports and emergency numbers Note Emergency numbers preset in this way cannot be deleted You can only preset different public emergency numbers by subsequently changing the country settings Note Make sure that there are no conflicts between country specific emergency numbers and your internal phone numbering plan Assign new internal phone num...

Page 537: ...n The selection of the dial level Location National International is country specific Depending on the country and the settings for the local area code above a dial level must be selected example In Belgium local area codes do not exist Here the dial level Localité must not be selected Reconnaissance globale du code de fournisseur LCR Nombre de chiffres Les chiffres commencent par Requirements Dis...

Page 538: ...ections accounts Tonalité Tonalité d appel Tonalité d occupation Depending on the location of the PBX the signalling tones are correspondingly preconfigured but they can also be changed For these tones only the frequencies 400 425 440 and 450 Hz are possible Tones differing from these frequencies are rounded to the nearest frequency Note Do not change the preconfigured values for dial tone ringer ...

Page 539: ...Appels d urgence COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 539 Appels d urgence Settings of the Emergency Calls Settings of the Emergency Calls ...

Page 540: ... Calls COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 540 Settings of the Emergency Calls Emergency Call has Priority Emergency Numbers Service Numbers Emergency Call has PriorityEmergency NumbersService Numbers ...

Page 541: ... an emergency call to be made Important If Emergency Call Priority is disabled and other calls are being made during an emergency there is a risk that the emergency call cannot be made immediately Note The emergency call priority switch is enabled for the entire PBX Appel d urgence uniquement avec code d accès à la ligne principale Requirements Automatic exchange line request also for individual s...

Page 542: ...ligne principale is enabled there is a risk that the exchange line access number is forgotten in an emergency so that no emergency call can be made Note When switched off an emergency number can be dialled without exchange line access number but it is not possible to assign internal numbers which begin with the first digits of an emergency number Note If you try to disable Appel d urgence uniqueme...

Page 543: ...ternal numbers as emergency call or service phone numbers Note Public emergency numbers e g beginning with 11 are entered without an area code which reduces the size of the internal call numbering plan For example if the emergency phone numbers are 110 and 112 this means the internal numbers 110 and 112 and also 1100 to 1109 and 1120 to 1129 are no longer available Note All other emergency numbers...

Page 544: ... the system phone The name along with the phone number also appears on some pages of the Configuration Manager e g Call data list Nouveau Adds a new emergency or service number Important The exchange line access number is never entered when entering emergency or service numbers Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 545: ... the internal call numbering plan For example if the service phone number is 115 this means the internal numbers 115 and 1150 to 1159 are no longer available Note All other service phone numbers are entered with area code Note Some countries e g Denmark Greece Luxembourg do not have a fixed number sequence for their area codes If this also applies to the location at which the PBX is installed you ...

Page 546: ...ware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 546 Adds a new emergency or service number Important The exchange line access number is never entered when entering emergency or service numbers Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 547: ...irmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 547 Analogique Settings of the Analogue Connection Expert Configuration of the Analogue Connection Settings of the Analogue ConnectionExpert Configuration of the Analogue Connection ...

Page 548: ...f the Analogue Connection COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 548 Settings of the Analogue Connection Analogue Connection Analogue Phone Number Analogue ConnectionAnalogue Phone Number ...

Page 549: ...ction Proceed as follows Separately for analogue ports Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Analogique Numéros de téléphone Requirements External analogue port optional see Technical Data in the Instructions Connexion analogique Select the analogue connection to be displayed configured ...

Page 550: ... Number Proceed as follows Separately for analogue ports Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Analogique Numéros de téléphone Requirements External analogue port optional see Technical Data in the Instructions Connexion analogique Select the analogue connection to be displayed configured ...

Page 551: ...19 551 Expert Configuration of the Analogue Connection Analogue Connection General Info Line Connection Start of Call Outgoing Calls End of the Call Clip Feature Codes Tones Ring Signal Analogue ConnectionGeneral InfoLine ConnectionStart of Call Outgoing Calls End of the CallClipFeature CodesTonesRing Signal ...

Page 552: ...red Apply country settings for Accepts the country settings for the selected country Note The analogue port has default settings that are required for analogue ports in the country in which the PBX is operating The settings are specified by selecting the country when you set up the device for the first time Changes to the port must be made for example when connecting a GSM gateway that was purchas...

Page 553: ...Analogue Connection COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 553 Copier les paramètres vers Exécuter Copies the expert configuration settings to the selected port ...

Page 554: ...ly country settings for Accepts the country settings for the selected country Note The analogue port has default settings that are required for analogue ports in the country in which the PBX is operating The settings are specified by selecting the country when you set up the device for the first time Changes to the port must be made for example when connecting a GSM gateway that was purchased in a...

Page 555: ...General Info COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 555 Copier les paramètres vers Exécuter Copies the expert configuration settings to the selected port ...

Page 556: ... a dial tone has been sent from the public exchange It starts dialling as soon as it detects a dial tone for 200 milliseconds This function prevents the PBX dialling the wrong number by starting dialling too early if the public exchange takes too long to play the external dial tone it generates Note Disable this setting if the dial tone cannot be sent clearly by the public exchange and as a result...

Page 557: ...er Reconnaître et attendre automatiquement l indicatif de ligne 0 9 A dialling pause of 3 seconds is inserted automatically after the PBX dials the number character string entered here This is needed if the public exchange requires a pause after the specified line access code is dialled Évaluation du courant de boucle Requirements The loop current detection function to detect the network provider ...

Page 558: ...ier chiffre 1 30 secondes Note This setting is only relevant when the setting send is enabled The waiting time serves for post dialling digits before the PBX recognises that dialling has been finished and sends to the exchange line signalises the exchange line that the number sequence is completed Time measurement restarts after the entry of each digit The possibilty of post dialling digits is not...

Page 559: ...he public exchange Reconnaissance de la tonalité occupée The PBX recognises the busy signal sent by the public exchange recommended setting This is needed to allow the CCBS callback when busy function to be enabled using the PBX s internal phones Max hold time until audio connection established 0 30 seconds The time to wait until the audio connection is created specifies the maximum time in second...

Page 560: ...htet werden soll Reconnaissance de la tonalité occupée appels entrants Reconnaissance de la tonalité occupée appels sortants The PBX recognises the busy signal sent by the public exchange It needs this to identify that the call connection has finished and to automatically disconnect an ISDN phone Note Disable this setting if the PBX identifies disruptions on the external line as the busy signal be...

Page 561: ...der as the end of the call The PBX recognises the continuous tone sent by the network provider as the end of the call connection Évaluation du courant de boucle Requirements The PBX must recognise the drop in loop current sent by the network provider at the end of the call The PBX recognises the end of the call when the network provider drops the loop current to zero Chiffre MFV D Requirements The...

Page 562: ...in the Instructions Connexion analogique Select the analogue connection to be displayed configured Type d informations CLIP Requirements CLIP feature transmission and display of the caller s phone number enabled by network provider The type of CLIP information specifies whether and how the analogue network provider sends the CLIP information Aucune The network provider does not send the CLIP infor...

Page 563: ...CLIP The CLIP sub version specifies when the analogue network provider sends the CLIP information Aucune analyse des informations CLIP The data sent by the network provider is not forwarded to the internal subscriber Amplification 0 à 25 dB CLIP information amplification specifies the number of decibels by which the PBX increases or reduces all the audio signals when CLIP information is being rece...

Page 564: ...codes specify the character strings the analogue network provider requires to execute a service feature on the analogue connection If a service feature is requested on one of the PBX s ISDN subscribers e g system phone the PBX automatically converts it into the character strings required for the analogue network provider For the following functions feature codes can be entered Masquer le numéro de...

Page 565: ...mware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 565 Désactiver le transf si non réponse CFNR Possible entries Digits 0 to 9 The and characters n as a wildcard for the phone number comma for a one second pause R as a wildcard for a flash ...

Page 566: ...the analogue connection to be displayed configured The character strings show which tones are sent by the analogue network provider This means the PBX can then identify the tones and apply them accordingly The network provider uses these tones in the following situations Tonalité When a subscriber picks up the call Busy signal If the required connection is busy busy signal 1 or if the network is o...

Page 567: ...tact the Support team before making any changes to these character strings Note An incorrect character string will cause the PBX to operate incorrectly The character strings can be change for the following tones Tonalité 1 tonalité normale Tonalité 2 tonalité spéciale Tonalité 3 tonalité Centrix Busy tone 1 call target busy Busy tone 2 network busy Tonalité d appel 1 Tonalité d appel 2 Tonalité d ...

Page 568: ...des specify the character strings the analogue network provider requires to execute a service feature on the analogue connection If a service feature is requested on one of the PBX s ISDN subscribers e g system phone the PBX automatically converts it into the character strings required for the analogue network provider For the following functions feature codes can be entered Masquer le numéro de t...

Page 569: ...ware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 569 Désactiver le transf si non réponse CFNR Possible entries Digits 0 to 9 The and characters n as a wildcard for the phone number comma for a one second pause R as a wildcard for a flash ...

Page 570: ...tion Settings PBX Base Number Bundle Expert Configuration for the PTP Connection Settings of the Extension Settings of the Additional Numbers Settings of the PTMP ConnectionExpert Configuration of the PTMP ConnectionSettings PBX Base Number BundleExpert Configuration for the PTP ConnectionSettings of the ExtensionSettings of the Additional Numbers ...

Page 571: ...onnection COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 571 Settings of the PTMP Connection Network Provider Miscellaneous Multiple Subscriber Numbers Network ProviderMiscellaneousMultiple Subscriber Numbers ...

Page 572: ...Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Select the PTMP connection to be displayed configured La ligne peut passer des appels d urgence Requirements The corresponding connection must allow emergency calls This exchange line can be used for emergency calls Note When switched off this exchange line cannot be used for emergency calls When you attempt to dial an emergency number you will hear the announcement T...

Page 573: ...onnection on external S0 port Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Select the PTMP connection to be displayed configured Name of the PTMP connection For identification of the connection within the PBX Paramètres expert Configurer Opens the expert configuration Passerelle GSM The S0 port supports the GSM gateway connected to it Any phone numbers can be used for the connection They must be entered in the P...

Page 574: ...hone at the internal destination Note If the PBX is not connected to the land line outgoing external calls can only be accepted via a targeted exchange line access using the phone numbers entered on the page Routage VoIP GSM Routing Numéros de téléphone d exception and the corresponding accesses also configured on this page or via a configured preferred exchange line Paramètres de ligne for subscr...

Page 575: ...ection on external S0 port Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Select the PTMP connection to be displayed configured Numéro d abonné multiple MSN The PTMP connection has up to 10 multiple subscriber numbers The network provider assigns the phone numbers for the connection Select Nouveau to enter Phone number for CLIP no screening Requirements Set up phone number CLIP no screening switched on for the ISD...

Page 576: ...oses on the system phone Sonnerie The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal external calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences Nouveau Adds a new phone number Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 577: ...ed Information V13 06 2019 577 Expert Configuration of the PTMP Connection Liasion Point Multi Point PMP General Info Routage Transfert d appel Présentation du numéro de téléphone Liasion Point Multi Point PMP General InfoRoutageTransfert d appelPrésentation du numéro de téléphone ...

Page 578: ...Manager page Réseaux publics RNIS Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Paramètres expert Configurer Requirements Configured PTMP connection Paramètres régionaux pour cette ligne When setting up and relocating the PBX the country specific settings are set automatically County settings for this exchange line Requirements Adopt settings from PBX location Germany disabled Select the country for this exchange...

Page 579: ...is depends on the network provider country Important Some telephony providers do not send charge information If this type of provider is being used you cannot apply any charges to a particular call Important You cannot check exactly how many PBXs should be charged for each call because for example you cannot uniquely assign the charges to one of the two subscribers involved in a query call from an...

Page 580: ...Requirements Configured PTMP connection Indicatif international International phone prefix e g 0044 for the UK Local area code Phone number prefix e g 0208 for Greater London Note If there is no fixed digit sequence as the area code at the installation location of the PBX no entry is required here Niveau de sélection The selection of the dial level Location National International is country specif...

Page 581: ...ne Conserver la couche 1 active de manière permanente Requirements External S0 port optional see Technical Data in the Operating Constructions An activation of the layer 1 is requested from the PBX as soon as the layer is put into the idle state by the network provider Thus for example a delay time is avoided before the external dial tone indicates its action readiness Temporisation de la langue s...

Page 582: ...ormation V13 06 2019 582 Aucun T310 pour boîtes d informations Note This is a country specific setting only relevant in Italy T310 is a timer for ISDN that disconnects a call connection after a certain time The call is not disconnected after a certain time ...

Page 583: ...ion Point Multi Point PMP Paramètres expert Configurer Requirements Configured PTMP connection Utiliser Soft LCR 4 0 pour ce raccordement Requirements Network provider must support the dial around service Configured prefixes country prefix and local area code Configured LCR see LCR The ISDN connection is used for LCR calls Note LCR must be disabled if the network provider does not support LCR Note...

Page 584: ...led Adopt settings from PBX location Germany The digits in the table below are the common LCR number prefixes in Germany For other countries more LCR number prefixes a total of 10 can be entered Nombre de chiffres Les chiffres commencent par 5 010 6 0100 Nouveau A new digit is added to the table Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 585: ...TMP connection GENERAL SETTINGS FOR THE CALL FORWARDING GENERAL SETTINGS FOR CALL FORWARDING Méthode de transfert d appel Call forwardings at the exchange line are configured and performed in different ways The exchange line router or the provider determines which of the call forwardings listed below can be used Installation CF The call forwarding is controlled in the PTMP exchange line The standa...

Page 586: ...t be displayed unless CLIP no scrrening is used which is not supported by many providers Note The setting Installation CF has priority to the setting 2 B channel For call forwarding via the PBX use any available call channel Requirements Enabled call forwarding method 2 B channel When an external phone number is forwarded the call can be forwarded via a call channel on any of the other ports Note ...

Page 587: ...unction the waiting time depends on their settings and cannot be configured in the PBX Routing via exception numbers VoIP GSM Requirements Configured exception numbers page Routage Routage VoIP GSM Numéros de téléphone d exception Enabled call forwarding method 2 B channel The device checks whether the destination number involved in call forwarding for external numbers has been set up as an except...

Page 588: ...Telephony 3 kHz Automatically not available Indicateur de service pour la commutation Select the Service Indicator for the switching All services Speech only Audio 3kHz Speech Audio Telephony 3 kHz Automatically not available Numéro composé CDPN de type Numéro composé CDPN au format Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means both settings must be made in dependency to each o...

Page 589: ...known Subscriber National International how the phone number shall be transferred Select the phone number format dependent on the phone number type Utiliser identité en départ en cas de transfert d appel Requirements CLIP no screening switched on for the ISDN connection If a call is forwarded via the external connection the caller s phone number is sent to the destination of the forwarded call If ...

Page 590: ...ssible entries Digits 0 to 9 The and characters n as a wildcard for the destination number CDPN s as a wildcard for the own phone number MSN CALL FORWARDING IF BUSY CFB Transfert d appel disponible dans la ligne If the exchange line has a CFB this function can be enabled Note If the exchange line does not have a CFB this function must be disabled Keypad Registro code Enable CFB Keypad Registro cod...

Page 591: ... If the exchange line has a CFNR this function can be enabled Note If the exchange line does not have a CFNR this function must be disabled Keypad Registro code Enable CFNR Keypad Registro code Disable CFNR The feature codes specify the character strings the ISDN network provider requires to execute a service feature on the ISDN connection Possible entries Digits 0 to 9 The and characters n as a w...

Page 592: ...s Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics RNIS Liasion Point Multi Point PMP Paramètres expert Configurer Requirements Configured PTMP connection OUTGOING CALLS CDPN OUTGOING CALLS CDPN CDPN of type CDPN in format Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means both settings must be made in dependency to each other Select the type Unknown Subscriber National Internat...

Page 593: ...specific Infoélément The called party number is sent as info element Préfixe de composition The called party number is sent as keypad sequence The dial prefix is provider specific e g 31 OUTGOING CALLS CGPN OUTGOING CALLS CGPN Propre numéro de téléphone de type Propre numéro de téléphone au format Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means both settings must be made in depen...

Page 594: ...ber The LLC call type is adopted from the subscriber automatique Audio 3kHz is preferably used At problems with the destination it is automatically switched to Speech Identité en départ The called party sees a customer defined phone number instead of a phone number assgined by the network provider The customer defined number is not checked by the exchange line for correctness CLIP no screening fro...

Page 595: ...u format Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means both settings must be made in dependency to each other Select the type Unknown Subscriber National International how the phone number shall be transferred Select the phone number format dependent on the phone number type Codage spécial du numéro de téléphone associé Par défaut Must be selected in all countries except for Sp...

Page 596: ...ed Information V13 06 2019 596 Waiting for direct dialling 4 8 sec Note This is a country specific setting only relevant in Austria Enter a waiting time until the direct dialling between 4 and 8 seconds This is useful when the phone number is first transferred incompletely ...

Page 597: ...n has a PBX base number base number header base phone number and Direct Dial In DDI extension numbers The network provider assigns the phone numbers for the connection The phone number to be dialled is formed from the PBX base number DDI extension number Nom For identification of the connection within the PBX Extensions block DDI numbers de À A PTP connection has a PBX base number base number head...

Page 598: ... extension number to be different from the ones used in linear call distribution or if an extension number is needed for a different function e g remote configuration CLIP no screening you must also enter it in the phone number list page Réseaux publics RNIS Numéros Directs SDA en PTP Note For example for extensions block 0 to 99 enter extension 0 as an extension and assign it in the call distribu...

Page 599: ...M gateways accept external phone calls automatically This may cause call charges for the caller even if no one picks up the phone at the internal destination Note If the PBX is not connected to the land line outgoing external calls can only be accepted via a targeted exchange line access using the phone numbers entered on the page Routage VoIP GSM Routing Numéros de téléphone d exception and the c...

Page 600: ...ation Port x Assigns the PBX base number entered here to a port Note If the network provider assigns the same PBX base number to a number of PTP connections these connections can be bundled together A bundled PTP connection consists of all the ports assigned to the same line that have the same phone number and the same extensions block Additional settings can also be made for the bundle Note A pri...

Page 601: ... Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 601 Expert Configuration for the PTP Connection Connexion PTP Général Routage Transfert d appel Présentation du numéro de téléphone Connexion PTPGénéralRoutageTransfert d appelPrésentation du numéro de téléphone ...

Page 602: ...uration Manager page Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer Requirements Configured PBX base number Paramètres régionaux pour cette ligne When setting up and relocating the PBX the country specific settings are set automatically County settings for this exchange line Requirements Adopt settings from PBX location Germany disabled Select the country for this excha...

Page 603: ...do not send charge information If this type of provider is being used you cannot apply any charges to a particular call Important You cannot check exactly how many PBXs should be charged for each call because for example you cannot uniquely assign the charges to one of the two subscribers involved in a query call from an external call Important If you are using the Soft LCR 4 0 LCR procedure the d...

Page 604: ...his function is enabled but the network provider does not support it service feature not unlocked it might still happen that the caller is given the option of a callback In this case the caller s reply is not forwarded to the PBX and therefore the function cannot be performed Important In addition this function can often only be used if both call partners are using the same network provider ...

Page 605: ...Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer Requirements Configured PBX base number Indicatif international International phone prefix e g 0044 for the UK Local area code Phone number prefix e g 0208 for Greater London Note If there is no fixed digit sequence as the area code at the installation location of the PBX no entry is required here Niveau de sélection The selection of the dial level Lo...

Page 606: ... a port a source that is synchronous to the ISDN exchange line Conserver la couche 1 active de manière permanente Requirements External S0 port optional see Technical Data in the Operating Constructions An activation of the layer 1 is requested from the PBX as soon as the layer is put into the idle state by the network provider Thus for example a delay time is avoided before the external dial tone...

Page 607: ...ll outstanding digits are transferred via DTMF Aucun T310 pour boîtes d informations Note This is a country specific setting only relevant in Italy T310 is a timer for ISDN that disconnects a call connection after a certain time The call is not disconnected after a certain time ...

Page 608: ... publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer Requirements Configured PBX base number Utiliser Soft LCR 4 0 pour ce raccordement Requirements Network provider must support the dial around service Configured prefixes country prefix and local area code Configured LCR see LCR The ISDN connection is used for LCR calls Note LCR must be disabled if the network provider does not sup...

Page 609: ...led Adopt settings from PBX location Germany The digits in the table below are the common LCR number prefixes in Germany For other countries more LCR number prefixes a total of 10 can be entered Nombre de chiffres Les chiffres commencent par 5 010 6 0100 Nouveau A new digit is added to the table Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 610: ...nfigurer Requirements Configured PBX base number GENERAL SETTINGS FOR CALL FORWARDING Méthode de transfert d appel Call forwardings at the exchange line are configured and performed in different ways The exchange line router or the provider determines which of the call forwardings listed below can be used Installation CF The call forwarding is controlled in the PTMP exchange line The standardized ...

Page 611: ...t be displayed unless CLIP no scrrening is used which is not supported by many providers Note The setting Installation CF has priority to the setting 2 B channel For call forwarding via the PBX use any available call channel Requirements Enabled call forwarding method 2 B channel When an external phone number is forwarded the call can be forwarded via a call channel on any of the other ports Note ...

Page 612: ... waiting time depends on their settings and cannot be configured in the PBX Routing via exception numbers VoIP GSM Requirements Configured exception numbers page Routage Routage VoIP GSM Numéros de téléphone d exception Enabled call forwarding method 2 B channel The device checks whether the destination number involved in call forwarding for external numbers has been set up as an exception number ...

Page 613: ...r the switching All services Speech only Audio 3kHz Speech Audio Telephony 3 kHz Automatically not available Numéro composé CDPN de type Numéro composé CDPN au format Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means both settings must be made in dependency to each other Select the type Unknown Subscriber National International how the phone number shall be transferred Select the p...

Page 614: ...ndent on the phone number type Utiliser identité en départ en cas de transfert d appel Requirements CLIP no screening switched on for the ISDN connection If a call is forwarded via the external connection the caller s phone number is sent to the destination of the forwarded call If it is an anonymous call the function behaves as if it was switched off Note When switched off the PBX s phone number ...

Page 615: ...ne If the exchange line has a CFB this function can be enabled Note If the exchange line does not have a CFB this function must be disabled CALL FORWARDING ON NO REPLY CFNR Transfert d appel disponible dans la ligne If the exchange line has a CFNR this function can be enabled Note If the exchange line does not have a CFNR this function must be disabled ...

Page 616: ...uration Manager page Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer Requirements Configured PBX base number OUTGOING CALLS CDPN CDPN of type CDPN in format Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means both settings must be made in dependency to each other Select the type Unknown Subscriber National International how the phone number shall be transfe...

Page 617: ...party number is sent as keypad sequence The dial prefix is provider specific e g 31 OUTGOING CALLS CGPN Propre numéro de téléphone de type Propre numéro de téléphone au format Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means both settings must be made in dependency to each other Select the type Unknown Subscriber National International how the phone number shall be transferred Sel...

Page 618: ...peech Identité en départ The called party sees a customer defined phone number instead of a phone number assgined by the network provider The customer defined number is not checked by the exchange line for correctness CLIP no screening from type Identité en départ au format Requirements Enabled Identité en départ for incmong calls Note The settings of type and in format build a group which means b...

Page 619: ...e transferred Select the phone number format dependent on the phone number type Codage spécial du numéro de téléphone associé Par défaut Must be selected in all countries except for Spain Espagne Must be selected in Spain Note Depending on the provider in Spain the special encoding Par défaut might as well be selected FOR INCOMING CALLS Waiting for direct dialling 4 8 sec Note This is a country sp...

Page 620: ...e PBX base number was configured Extension DDI number If you want an extension number to be different from the ones used in linear call distribution or if an extension number is needed for a different function e g remote configuration CLIP no screening you must also enter it in the phone number list click on Nouveau You must enter all the extension numbers for a PTP connection that is not running ...

Page 621: ...sferred to the destination by the exchange line without its correctness being checked Nom The name is used for display purposes on the system phone Sonnerie The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal external calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences Nouveau Adds a new phone number Supprimer...

Page 622: ...hat more then one PBX base number was configured Numéro de téléphone supplémentaire Some countries provide additional numbers for a PTP connection in addition to the DDI numbers The network provider can assign up to ten phone numbers for the connection The additional number specifies which character string a caller must dial from the local phone network to reach the ISDN PTP connection These numbe...

Page 623: ...ice phone number that is transferred to the destination by the exchange line without its correctness being checked Nom The name is used for display purposes on the system phone Sonnerie The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal external calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences Nouveau Adds...

Page 624: ...t Settings for the VoIP Accounts Expert Settings of the PTMP Connection Expert Settings of the PTP Connection Settings Additional Numbers VoIP Management of the VoIP ProviderSettings of the VoIP ProviderManagement VoIP AccountSettings for the VoIP AccountsExpert Settings of the PTMP ConnectionExpert Settings of the PTP ConnectionSettings Additional Numbers VoIP ...

Page 625: ...rovider Nouveau Adds a new provider to the list of providers You must then make the settings for the VoIP provider Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list Importer Importer le fournisseur Requirements PC or PBX with existing connection to the Internet A file with individual provider access data XML will be downloaded from the update server Depending on the Internet connection this file is...

Page 626: ...n then be imported Note The access data provided for the download is for information purposes only and is not mandatory Exporter The list of providers is saved to the PC data storage device in a file called provider tgz Copier Selects an existing provider from the list of providers and uses that provider as the basis for creating a new VoIP provider ...

Page 627: ...R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 627 Settings of the VoIP Provider SIP RTP Settings Number Presentation outgoing Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages SIPRTPSettingsNumber Presentation outgoing Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages ...

Page 628: ...ed DNS server For using a STUN server IP operating mode IPv4 Fournisseur Select the provider to be displayed configured Domaine The domain also known as a realm SIP domain or SIP realm is required for the VoIP address The structure of a subscriber s VoIP address is similar to an e mail address It is made up of the VoIP phone number and the domain separated by the character subscriber domain Résolu...

Page 629: ...Utiliser son propre DNS via le dispositif d accès intégré The DNS servers that are entered below are used via the selected IAD under Accès Internet utilisé First DNS server Deuxième serveur DNS IPv4 4 blocks with 3 digits separated by a dot IPv6 8 blocks with 4 digits or letters separated by a colon Note If an IPv6 address is entered as DNS server then the IAD selected under Accès Internet utilisé...

Page 630: ...f danger It is essential you put additional protective measures in place Time limit for registration 1 to 60 min The registration time specifies how many minutes the PBX waits before reregistering itself with the VoIP provider Note In the test phase after configuring the VoIP provider we recommend you enter a low value e g three minutes After completing the test phase you can enter a much higher v...

Page 631: ...er must also be specified for the VoIP provider Enabled NAT traversal is performed by the PBX To achieve this the registrar for the VoIP provider must be switched on The SIP request also contains an rport part in which the IP addresses used here local public are transported Note If Enabled is selected If problems occur with single sided call connections use Enabled with use of STUN instead Caution...

Page 632: ...viders block accounts if the Interval for NAT Keep Alive is too short As a rule this is reported with error message 503 during SIP registration If you encounter this problem we recommend you set a higher value e g 180 Proxy sortant The outbound proxy is an intermediate server that processes all VoIP requests and connections going to the provider except for registration automatique The PBX automati...

Page 633: ...ion is still present The PBX cannot detect whether a call connection is disrupted due to problems on the provider side Note When the SIP session timer is switched on this may result in the call being interrupted more frequently after the specified interval if a VoIP provider has not implemented session renewal properly In this case you should adjust the interval of the SIP session timer or switch ...

Page 634: ...ct as short a time as possible because the PBX does not forward the entire phone number to the public exchange until the specified time has passed Note Approximately three seconds is the default value for manual inputs SIPS Structure URL Requirements External VoIP channel that supports SIPS optional see Technical Data in the Instructions A certificate for the VoIP provider stored in the PBX This p...

Page 635: ...IPv4 operating mode is used for communications with the VoIP provider IPv6 IPv6 operating mode is used for communications with the VoIP provider automatique The PBX first checks whether the VoIP provider supports IPv6 If so operating mode IPv6 is used for communications with the VoIP provider Otherwise operating mode IPv4 is used Note If the actual IP operating mode is IPv6 STUN cannot be used as ...

Page 636: ...entering a URL configured DNS server For using a STUN server IP operating mode IPv4 Fournisseur Select the provider to be displayed configured Nombre maximum de canaux VoIP mis à disposition par le fournisseur VoIP Number of VoIP channels provided by the VoIP provider If these channels are occupied additional connections required are made using another provider Pour les canaux VoIP réservés aux ap...

Page 637: ...crypted and then transmitted if not the call data will not be encrypted obligatoire Forces enabling of call data encryption by SRTP The connection is not established if the call partner VoIP provider other PBX in sub system operation or external VoIP subscriber does not require call data to be encrypted using SRTP Note SIPS should also be enabled at the same time otherwise the key for SRTP encrypt...

Page 638: ...d for the VoIP provider Caution Each time a port is opened on the NAT router this creates a potential source of danger It is essential you put additional protective measures in place utilisier l adresse IP publique statique Requirements Registered fixed IP address see Settings NAT traversal is performed by the PBX The VoIP provider requires a connection via a static public IP address Signalisation...

Page 639: ...external VoIP channel that supports different codecs optional see Technical Data in the Instructions VoIP provider who supports the different codecs The PBX makes various codecs available The selection of a codec affects the quality of a VoIP call Different codecs can be configured depending on the available connection bandwidth ranging from codecs with the best possible VoIP call quality down to ...

Page 640: ...quence with stronger compression lower bandwidth as highest priority Note The preset codec sequence can be changed manually if necessary Note If using a codec with high bandwidth e g G 711 causes too much negative impact on the call quality it may be that there is not enough connection bandwidth If the call quality is impacted frequently it is a good idea to only select codecs with lower bandwidth...

Page 641: ...ng a URL configured DNS server For using a STUN server IP operating mode IPv4 Fournisseur Select the provider to be displayed configured Serveur STUN Adresse IP ou URL Port Intervalle pour requête du serveur STUN Requirements IP operating mode IPv4 NAT traversal Enabled with use of STUN A STUN server provides information to subscribers on a private network on request This information includes the ...

Page 642: ...be used as a sub system Note During sub system operation single digit dialling may cause problems In this case en bloc dialling is usually enabled Audio is switched through at call forwarding via 2nd B channel The connection between the caller and the PBX is always created when a call is forwarded externally As a result the caller will hear all replayed elements tones announcements which are playe...

Page 643: ...ls It is possible to make an emergency call using this provider and the account assigned to it Note When switched off this provider does not support emergency calls When you attempt to dial an emergency number you will hear the announcement This phone does not allow emergency calls Please use an alternative DNS query persists SIP session RFC 3263 Requirements SIP stack type 2 selected The SIP stac...

Page 644: ...supports T 38 optional see Technical Data in the Instructions VoIP provider support for T 38 Configured internal fax subscribers T 38 procedures for real time Group 3 facsimile communication over IP networks enables smooth extensive fax transmission to take place Note If problems occur when T 38 is switched on you can change the setting used to negotiate the fax protocol Négociation T 38 Conforme ...

Page 645: ...d DNS server For using a STUN server IP operating mode IPv4 Fournisseur Select the provider to be displayed configured Format du numéro de téléphone composé Format in which the VoIP provider requires the phone number of the destination to enable the VoIP provider to transfer the call Country code with leading zeroes The destination phone number is transmitted from the PBX to the VoIP provider with...

Page 646: ...automatically converts the phone numbers dialled into this format for calls made via the VoIP provider Note If prefixes are necessary for conversion for dialling a number without prefixes the prefixes set for the account are used Réseaux publics VoIP Comptes Configurer Format du numéro de téléphone personnel Format in which the VoIP provider requires the phone number that is to be transmitted Coun...

Page 647: ...hout prefixes e g 920082 or 92008279 Only DDI number only possible for PTP connection Your own external phone number that is to be transferred is sent to the VoIP provider without prefixes or the PBX base number e g 8279 Indicatif régional sans zéro initial p ex 5306 Your own external phone number that is to be transferred is sent to the VoIP provider with the local area code but without a leading...

Page 648: ...ame In accordance with RFC 3325 with P Asserted Identity Your own external phone number that is to be transferred Network Provided Number is sent to the VoIP provider in the User area of the P Asserted Identity header In accordance with RFC 3325 with P Preferred Identity Your own external phone number that is to be transferred Network Provided Number is sent to the VoIP provider in the User area o...

Page 649: ...resentation suppression Aucun texte affiché If number presentation suppression is switched on an empty display text is sent in the From header Anonyme The sent display text in the From header is anonymous if number presentation suppression is switched on User Anonymous If number presentation suppression is switched on both the display text and the User name section in the From header contain anony...

Page 650: ...ng mode IPv4 Fournisseur Select the provider to be displayed configured The phone numbers of incoming VoIP calls listed in the call data list usually need to be converted before they can be used for callbacks Note To check these settings direct incoming exchange line calls via this VoIP provider e g using a mobile phone and check the phone number sent along with the call in the call data list in D...

Page 651: ...dard canonical format are received e g 445306 or 00445306 they are converted into this format Évaluer Connected Party Number COPN Enabling this function prevents that a direct callback fails due to an incorrect depiction of the phone number when the call is answered Définir le préfixe du numéro de téléphone Sets a prefix for the country code before the phone number maximum 10 characters Source pou...

Page 652: ...ng the From Header as a Screened Number Selects an evaluation method for phone numbers which will work for most providers The user provided number unscreened number corresponds to CLIP no screening in the From header is transferred to the network provided number screened number The phone numbers can be used for example for Call Through via VoIP Caution As soon as you have enabled this option your ...

Page 653: ...000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 653 Management VoIP Account Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics Voice over IP VoIP page Comptes Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 654: ...n V13 06 2019 654 Settings for the VoIP Accounts Network Provider Location Access Data Miscellaneous Phone Numbers for PTP Connection Phone Numbers for PTMP connection Network ProviderLocation Access DataMiscellaneousPhone Numbers for PTP ConnectionPhone Numbers for PTMP connection ...

Page 655: ...played configured Le compte peut passer des appels d urgence Requirements VoIP provider has authorised and switched on emergency call ability This account allows emergency calls to be made Note When switched off this account cannot be used for emergency calls When you attempt to dial an emergency number you will hear the announcement This phone does not allow emergency calls Please use an alternat...

Page 656: ...s is an internal number You can select any of the numbers in the internal supply of phone numbers This is then used for the specific VoIP access point Note A number cannot be allocated twice Note Using numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 t...

Page 657: ...s by different providers For example the terms Username Authorization User SIP code SIP password and SIP ID are all used to describe a user name Note If your provider in Germany is T Online you must also enter the VoIP phone number you received from them under Nom d utilisateur and Nom d affichage Mot de passe Password assigned by the VoIP provider when the account was set up It is used to verify ...

Page 658: ...risk After you enter your password click on Attribuer les mots de passe ID d authentification Authorisation ID authentication ID assigned by the VoIP provider for the VoIP account Note To change an existing password click on Show passwords Note You can only input an entry in this field if the VoIP provider has assigned an authorisation ID Caution Visible passwords are a security risk After you ent...

Page 659: ...parately for VoIP accounts Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics VoIP Comptes Configurer Note You will receive the settings data from the VoIP provider with whom you have set up the account Compte Select the account to be displayed configured Paramètres expert Configurer Opens the expert settings page ...

Page 660: ...ents CLIP no screening service feature supported and enabled by the network provider Type of number presentation configured for the VoIP provider In accordance with RFC 3325 with P Asserted Identity or In accordance with RFC 3325 with P Preferred Identity The exchange line transfers the customer specific phone number e g a service phone number entered in Phone number for CLIP no screening to the c...

Page 661: ...t the phone number for CLIP no screening is transmitted instead of the phone number received from the network provider Phone number for CLIP no screening Requirements set up phone number CLIP no screening switched on for the VoIP account Customer specific phone number e g a service phone number that is transferred to the destination by the exchange line without its correctness being checked Nom d ...

Page 662: ... 662 Sonnerie The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal external calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences Nouveau Adds a new phone number Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 663: ...ments CLIP no screening service feature supported and enabled by the network provider Type of number presentation configured for the VoIP provider In accordance with RFC 3325 with P Asserted Identity or In accordance with RFC 3325 with P Preferred Identity The exchange line transfers the customer specific phone number e g a service phone number entered in Phone number for CLIP no screening to the ...

Page 664: ...at the phone number for CLIP no screening is transmitted instead of the phone number received from the network provider Phone number for CLIP no screening Requirements set up phone number CLIP no screening switched on for the VoIP account Customer specific phone number e g a service phone number that is transferred to the destination by the exchange line without its correctness being checked Nom d...

Page 665: ...9 665 Sonnerie The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal external calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences Nouveau Adds a new phone number Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 666: ...he PTMP Connection COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 666 Expert Settings of the PTMP Connection VoIP Account General Info Routing Call Forwarding VoIP AccountGeneral InfoRoutingCall Forwarding ...

Page 667: ...P Account Country settings for this exchange line When setting up and relocating the PBX the country specific settings are set automatically County settings for this exchange line Requirements Adopt settings from PBX location Germany disabled Select the country for this exchange line ...

Page 668: ...e number prefix e g 0208 for Greater London for which the account s VoIP provider has provided the phone numbers Note If there is no fixed digit sequence as the area code at the installation location of the PBX no entry is required here Niveau de sélection The selection of the dial level Location National International is country specific Depending on the country and the settings for the local are...

Page 669: ...must be disabled if the network provider does not support LCR Note However you can always perform LCR manually by dialling a provider area code prefix if the network provider supports the dial around service LCR provider digit recognition for this connection Requirements Disabled Adopt settings from PBX location Germany The digits in the table below are the common LCR number prefixes in Germany Fo...

Page 670: ...Routing COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 670 6 0100 Nouveau A new digit is added to the table Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 671: ...Call forwarding shall be executed directly by the exchange line The PBX sends a corresponding message with new destination number to the exchange line Accordingly the call is forwarded to the new destination by the provider exchange line Note Currently providers support Call Deflection only at the SIP Trunk 2 B channel The call forwarding is performed by the PBX during a call It is possible for al...

Page 672: ...ed Delay time for Call Forwarding on no reply in the PBX This delay time for external numbers specifies the time in seconds after which a call is forwarded if the called subscriber does not respond Note The waiting time applies only to call forwarding that was set up using the PBX If the network provider has configured the call forwarding function the waiting time depends on their settings and can...

Page 673: ...of the caller is transmitted to the destination of the call forwarding In the case of an anonymous call the function acts as if not enabled Note When switched off the phone number in the PBX is transmitted to the call forwarding destination CALL FORWARDING UNCONDITIONAL CFU Transfert d appel disponible dans la ligne If the exchange line has a CFU this function can be enabled Note If the exchange l...

Page 674: ...ine does not have a CFB this function must be disabled Keypad Registro code Enable CFB Keypad Registro code Disable CFB The feature codes specify the character strings the VoIP network provider requires to execute a service feature on the VoIP connection Possible entries Digits 0 to 9 The and characters comma for a 0 5 second pause n as a wildcard for the destination number CDPN m as a wildcard fo...

Page 675: ...d Registro code Enable CFNR Keypad Registro code Disable CFNR The feature codes specify the character strings the VoIP network provider requires to execute a service feature on the VoIP connection Possible entries Digits 0 to 9 The and characters comma for a 0 5 second pause n as a wildcard for the destination number CDPN m as a wildcard for the own phone number MSN ...

Page 676: ...the PTP Connection COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 676 Expert Settings of the PTP Connection VoIP Account General Info Routing Call Forwarding VoIP AccountGeneral InfoRoutingCall Forwarding ...

Page 677: ...P Account Country settings for this exchange line When setting up and relocating the PBX the country specific settings are set automatically County settings for this exchange line Requirements Adopt settings from PBX location Germany disabled Select the country for this exchange line ...

Page 678: ...e number prefix e g 0208 for Greater London for which the account s VoIP provider has provided the phone numbers Note If there is no fixed digit sequence as the area code at the installation location of the PBX no entry is required here Niveau de sélection The selection of the dial level Location National International is country specific Depending on the country and the settings for the local are...

Page 679: ...must be disabled if the network provider does not support LCR Note However you can always perform LCR manually by dialling a provider area code prefix if the network provider supports the dial around service LCR provider digit recognition for this connection Requirements Disabled Adopt settings from PBX location Germany The digits in the table below are the common LCR number prefixes in Germany Fo...

Page 680: ...Routing COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 680 6 0100 Nouveau A new digit is added to the table Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 681: ...Call forwarding shall be executed directly by the exchange line The PBX sends a corresponding message with new destination number to the exchange line Accordingly the call is forwarded to the new destination by the provider exchange line Note Currently providers support Call Deflection only at the SIP Trunk 2 B channel The call forwarding is performed by the PBX during a call It is possible for al...

Page 682: ...ed Delay time for Call Forwarding on no reply in the PBX This delay time for external numbers specifies the time in seconds after which a call is forwarded if the called subscriber does not respond Note The waiting time applies only to call forwarding that was set up using the PBX If the network provider has configured the call forwarding function the waiting time depends on their settings and can...

Page 683: ...all forwarding via the external connection the phone number of the caller is transmitted to the destination of the call forwarding In the case of an anonymous call the function acts as if not enabled Note When switched off the phone number in the PBX is transmitted to the call forwarding destination CALL FORWARDING UNCONDITIONAL CFU Transfert d appel disponible dans la ligne If the exchange line h...

Page 684: ...te If the exchange line does not have a CFB this function must be disabled CALL FORWARDING NO REPLY CFNR Transfert d appel disponible dans la ligne If the exchange line has a CFNR this function can be enabled Note If the exchange line does not have a CFNR this function must be disabled ...

Page 685: ...ct the extension number bundle for that the additional numbers are to be displayed configured provided that more then one PBX base number was configured Phone number for CLIP no screening Requirements Set up phone number CLIP no screening switched on for the VoIP connection The exchange line must support CLIP no screening Customer specific phone number e g a service phone number that is transferre...

Page 686: ... 686 Sonnerie The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal external calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences Nouveau Adds a new phone number Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 687: ...COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 687 Acheminement des appels Management for the Call Distribution Settings for Call Distribution Management for the Call DistributionSettings for Call Distribution ...

Page 688: ...Management for the Call Distribution COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 688 Management for the Call Distribution Call Distribution for Call Distribution for ...

Page 689: ...a subscriber to signal incoming external calls it needs at least Discrimination business Entrants uniquement avec appel d urgence Abonnés Abo Propriétés Paramètres de ligne Note An internal destination can be assigned to an external number Internal destinations can be subscribers groups Voice mail and fax boxes or the automatic reception functions Note If several subscribers ring simultaneously th...

Page 690: ...erne Nom Réversion The caller is transferred to the fallback function Internal number The caller will be transferred to the selected internal number subscriber group voice mail fax box or automatic reception Note External numbers e g those used as remote switching programming numbers or call through numbers may not be used in the call distribution ISDN PTP connections VoIP PTP connections No de té...

Page 691: ...ber is not configured in the PBX the fallback function will be used Rejeter l appel The caller hears the busy signal Internal number The caller will be transferred to the selected internal number subscriber group voice mail fax box or automatic reception Note External numbers e g those used as remote switching programming numbers or call through numbers may not be used in the call distribution ...

Page 692: ...Call Distribution COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 692 Settings for Call Distribution Call Distribution for Modem Fax Call Distribution Call Distribution forModem Fax Call Distribution ...

Page 693: ...rsion The fallback function indicates how the PBX deals with calls which could not be transferred or rejected via call distribution Rejeter The caller will hear the busy signal Fallback settings The caller will be transferred according to the settings Only Announcement before Answering The caller hears the Announcement before Answering and then the connection is interrupted Fallback phone number a...

Page 694: ...ack number see fallback All calls which have not been answered will be redirected after the configured time Note The fallback time is the addition of the longest waiting time for the Call Forwarding on no reply and the seconds configured in après The longest waiting time will be determined by a comparison of the Delay time for CF on no reply in the PBX and the Temps d attente pour transf si non ré...

Page 695: ...gured connection type analogue connections If the active modem fax call distribution is enabled the PBX automatically accepts every external call to the corresponding phone number Using the dial tones it attempts to determine whether the incoming call is from a fax machine or from a modem If the corresponding dial tones are identified within the detection time frame configured the call is forwarde...

Page 696: ...atically transferred to the internal destination selected in the last column subscriber group fax box Note If you have selected the option Fax or Fax et modem in the actif list field the setting for the Passif check box will be ignored and active modem fax call distribution will be enabled Note The setting in the Durée de reconnaissance list field is not relevant for passive modem fax call distrib...

Page 697: ...e not been answered will be redirected after the configured time Note The fallback time is the addition of the longest waiting time for the Call Forwarding on no reply and the seconds configured in après The longest waiting time will be determined by a comparison of the Delay time for CF on no reply in the PBX and the Temps d attente pour transf si non réponse Acheminement des appels linéaire exte...

Page 698: ...Transfert d appel COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 698 Transfert d appel Settings for the Call Forwarding Settings for the Call Forwarding ...

Page 699: ...Settings for the Call Forwarding COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 699 Settings for the Call Forwarding Call Forwarding for Call Forwarding for ...

Page 700: ...nternal phone see Call Forwarding for External Numbers Using the menu function key on a system phone optional see the phone manual Transferts d appel pour Select the connections to be displayed configured Configuration permanente The configuration dependent settings will be overridden by the permanent configuration settings Note On a system phone you can switch on off over the call forwarding of e...

Page 701: ...n number Transf immédiat External calls to the external number are immediately forwarded to the entered external destination number Transf si non réponse On no reply external calls to the external number are forwarded to the entered external destination number Transf si occupé On busy external calls to the external number are forwarded to the entered external destination number Numéro de téléphone...

Page 702: ...Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Provisioning d IP Profils COMfortel DECT Propriétés Synthèse des fonctions Téléphones non attribués Tous les abonnés Numéros de téléphoneProvisioning d IPProfilsCOMfortel DECTPropriétés Synthèse des fonctionsTéléphones non attribuésTous les abonnés ...

Page 703: ...Numéros de téléphone COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 703 Numéros de téléphone Management Subscriber Management Subscriber ...

Page 704: ... be allocated twice Note Using numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note that c...

Page 705: ...ding on the connected end device Analogue end devices Téléphone analogue phone analogue modem Répondeur analogue answering machine Fax analogue fax machine Interphone analogue door terminal selection deletes the subscriber and opens Périphériques Assistant de périphériques for configuration of a door terminal Interface de paging analogue announcement output selection deletes the subscriber and ope...

Page 706: ...andset on a COMfortel DECT 900 Base Fax ISDN fax machine in compliance with the Euro ISDN Standard DSS1 VoIP end devices COMfortel IP COMfortel 1400 IP COMfortel 2600 IP COMfortel 3200 COMfortel 3500 COMfortel 3600 IP COMfortel 1200 IP COMfortel 1200 IP VoIP COMfortel 2500 AB COMfortel VoIP 2500 AB Téléphone VoIP par défaut Standard VoIP end device SIP from other manufacturers soft phone SIP Combi...

Page 707: ...the subscriber Filtres The list of subscribers is filtered by the entered or selected value Nouveau Adds a new subscriber You must then make the settings for this new subscriber Note After selecting the VoIP device types COMfortel IP and Téléphone VoIP par défaut you can already assign the MAC address and a provisioning file to the subscriber you can configure the provisioning file using the page ...

Page 708: ...or all transactions between phone and PBX the PBX must be able to identify the MAC address of the phone so that the phone can be matched to a subscriber and his her provisioning data Périphériques trouvés Select one of the existing MAC adresses Périphériques affectés MAC adresses already assigned to the subscribers manual assignement Enter manually only digits or take over a MAC adress after readi...

Page 709: ...Advanced Information V13 06 2019 709 Note If a MAC address has been entered and assigned to a subscriber the corresponding phone can already be provided with provisioning data during its first boot process Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 710: ...Provisioning d IP COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 710 Provisioning d IP Settings File Management SettingsFile Management ...

Page 711: ...the PBX Note When switched off no automatic configuration of the IP phones is carried out Auto provisioning actif Requirements Activated SIP convenience package brand plus page Administration Activation Shop online The activation of this package enables the provisioning of SIP end devices from other manufacturers Accès sans certificat client fonctionnement non sécurisé There are IP phones that hav...

Page 712: ...or the following IP phones COMfortel 1200 IP COMfortel 1400 IP 2600 IP 3600 IP Snom IP phones Yealink IP phones Provisioning uniquement au sein du réseau local Provisioning is only carried out within the local network Note When switched off provisioning can also be carried out on other possible networks unsafe operation Langue des téléphones après provisioning Phone language that is displayed on t...

Page 713: ...new file Pré réglage de l éditeur Éditeur de fichiers Via the file editor settings e g NTP or contacts are directly made in the provisioning file xml cfg Provisioning file xml cfg Éditer Variables for the parameters to be provisioned are created as palceholders in the configuration files provided by the manufacturer During provisioning these are replaced by the corresponding values from the PBX co...

Page 714: ...ge Administration Configuration IP Note The standard xml cannot be changed To edit the file save it under a different name and assign the devices accordingly Provisioning file xml cfg Éditer Changes in the setting in the COMfortel IP Editor are transferred to the provisioning file after saving Supprimer Note The default provisioning file Standard xml cannot be deleted Importer Importable file type...

Page 715: ...sensitive subscriber specific data To prevent unauthorised access subscribers can be specifically granted or denied access to provisioning files Granting access to Method individual subscribers Mark subscriber under Abonnés disponibles and click all subscribers Click all subscribers of a group Select group under Autorisation pour tous les abonnés du groupe Fichier d en tête Use file as header file...

Page 716: ... Snom or Yealink and for COMfortel IP phones additionally the COMfortel IP Editor Note The Standard xml cannot be edited Note We recommend to contact the system administrator or specialised dealer for editing provisioning files Note Under ID de compte you find the account IDs for the PBX and the exchange lines Note You will find further information about provisioning files on the Internet see Auer...

Page 717: ... Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 717 Profils Management Profile Settings of the Subscriber Profiles Settings Profile Assignment Management ProfileSettings of the Subscriber ProfilesSettings Profile Assignment ...

Page 718: ...Using the Configuration Manager Nom de profil The available profiles default profiles user defined profiles are displayed Consulter The selected settings can be viewed default profiles Configurer The user defined profiles can be adapted to the corresponding requirements user defined profiles Nouveau Creation of a new profile ...

Page 719: ...5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 719 Settings of the Subscriber Profiles Exchange Line Settings Reachability Authorisations Voicemail Fax Box Settings Exchange Line SettingsReachabilityAuthorisationsVoicemail Fax BoxSettings ...

Page 720: ...le you want to display configure Function related page Abonnés Abo Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the subscriber setting Note When switched off the setting under Abonnés Abo Propriétés applies Requirements For differently configurable functions for private and bus...

Page 721: ... is used for an outgoing call the PBX automatically dials the phone number with the configured area code national destination code Entrants uniquement Incoming external calls can be accepted Internal only No external calls can be made answered Exchange line dependent The exchange line authorisation is configured separately for each individual external connection via Experts Preventing emergency ca...

Page 722: ...all restrictor irrespective of his exchange line authorisation So it restricts the exchange line authorisation Call deblocker outgoing business Call deblocker outgoing private Requirements Configured call deblocker Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Numéros spéciaux The subscriber can dial the phone numbers entered in the call deblocker irrespective of his exchange line ...

Page 723: ...lls will be routed Occupation automatique For outgoing external calls any available connection is used whereby first the fixed network connections and then the VoIP connection and at last the GSM connections were taken into account Lignes privilégiées spéciales For outgoing external calls the connections released under Experts are used depending on the selected priority This makes the definition o...

Page 724: ...d on the PTP connection over which the subscriber is called if the subscriber is not a member of the call distribution for this connection the first MSN is presented En fonction de la ligne The phone number to be presented is configured separately for each external connection under Experts Note On a connection with a GSM gateway the phone number presentation configured in the PBX is not used becau...

Page 725: ... line can have an individual number presented to the network provider or to the caller separately The number presentation to the caller is suppressed by the phone before starting a call The number presentation to the network provider is not suppressed by the phone Note If the number presentation should always be suppressed the Présentation du numéro de téléphone appels sortants must be configured ...

Page 726: ...DI parallel to the internal number and the MSN on the PTM connection over which the subscriber is called are presented on the PTMP connection En fonction de la ligne The phone number to be presented is configured separately for each external connection under Experts Note For the option Aucune the phone service Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR2 must be released by the network provider...

Page 727: ...le you want to display configure Function related page Abonnés Abo Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the subscriber setting Note When switched off the setting under Abonnés Abo Propriétés applies Liste blanche appels entrants Requirements Configured call deblocker Us...

Page 728: ...ted one of the phone numbers entered in the selected call restrictor or no number is rejected Multi path Call Forwarding FMC Comportement d appel parallèle Numéro de téléphone composé Internal and external calls directed to the subscriber are also signalled at the entered destination number CFNR is executed Calls directed to a group are not considered Comportement de FMC Numéro de téléphone compos...

Page 729: ...for this call If the subscriber is the destination of a call forwarding again the call ends with the previous destination The caller hears the dial tone until the call is accepted If the destination is busy or the maximum call duration has been reached a busy signal is issued Note When switched off cascading does not take place Calls end with the entered destination Paramètres Transf si appel par ...

Page 730: ...nal calls to the subscriber are forwarded on busy to the entered destination number Transf si non réponse Numéro de téléphone composé Temps d attente pour transf si non réponse Internal and external calls to the subscriber are forwarded after the entered delay time to the entered destination number ...

Page 731: ...elated page Abonnés Abo Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the subscriber setting Note When switched off the setting under Abonnés Abo Propriétés applies Commutation des relais et des alarmes The subscriber can switch relays and alarms manually Commande du système par...

Page 732: ...métrage des caractéristiques au niveau de l exploitant de réseau transf clavier The subscriber can forward the own external number via phone switch the permanent configuration on off using a character string send keypad information to the network provider Configuration of Scr CF to external numbers The subscriber can forward the associated external number to an external destination Transfer of ext...

Page 733: ...Authorisations COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 733 switch group properties of groups which the subscriber is a member of switch on Follow me ...

Page 734: ...le you want to display configure Function related page Abonnés Abo Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the subscriber setting Note When switched off the setting under Abonnés Abo Propriétés applies Messagerie vocale Type de réponse aux appels Temps d attente pour trans...

Page 735: ...ice mailbox will be called if the subscriber does not reply or if the internal number of the subscriber is busy Appel informatif fonction de messagerie vocale The arrival of new voice messages immediately after completion of the recording will be signaled by a call from the voice mailbox to the subscriber When this is done the phone number or name of the voice mailbox is shown on the phone display...

Page 736: ...nt to display configure Function related page Abonnés Abo Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the subscriber setting Note When switched off the setting under Abonnés Abo Propriétés applies Messagerie vocale Type de réponse aux appels Temps d attente pour transf si non ...

Page 737: ...ailbox will be called if the subscriber does not reply or if the internal number of the subscriber is busy Appel informatif fonction de messagerie vocale The arrival of new voice messages immediately after completion of the recording will be signaled by a call from the voice mailbox to the subscriber When this is done the phone number or name of the voice mailbox is shown on the phone display Note...

Page 738: ... 738 Settings Profile Assignment Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager A configuration depending profile can be assigned to each subscriber group or voice mail fax box Tous contiennent le profil The same profile is assigned to all subcribers groups or boxes for one configuration ...

Page 739: ...gure a Function Key for PBX Functions Copying a Function Key Assignment into Other COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets Restoring a Phone Book from the PBX Using the Configuration Manager to Switch On the Login Mode of a COMfortel DECT 900 BaseAssigning Internal Phone Numbers to COMfortel DECT 900 900C HandsetsUsing the Configuration Manager to Log Out COMfortel DECT 900 900C HandsetsUsing the Configu...

Page 740: ...OMfortel DECT 900 Base because only three mobile phones can be called at the same time Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Requirements COMfortel DECT 900 Base connected to the internal S0 port COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets Configured internal numbers for the COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets 1 Open the page Abonnés Abo COMfortel DECT 2 Select the DECT base in the list field under...

Page 741: ...f a COMfortel DECT 900 Base COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 741 Note With older firmware versions of COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets it might be necessary to put the handset close to the COMfortel DECT 900 Base during registration ...

Page 742: ...phone numbers to the handsets under Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone before you log in the handsets to the base station Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Requirements COMfortel DECT 900 Base connected to the internal S0 port Configured internal numbers for the COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets 1 Open Abonnés Abo COMfortel DECT 2 Select the Base DECT 3 Select the phone number create...

Page 743: ...PUI may only be assigned one phone number Note If the base station has already been connected to the PBX and mobile handsets have been logged into it it is possible to view the list of ID numbers for these mobile handsets and to then select a number 5 Select the mobile handset type in question under IPUI of the handset serial number of the handset ...

Page 744: ...COMfortel DECT 900 Base connected to the internal S0 port COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets Configured and assigned internal numbers for the COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets 1 Open the page Abonnés Abo COMfortel DECT 2 Select the DECT base in the list field under Base DECT 3 Enable the Se déconnecter check box for the corresponding subscriber 4 Click Enregistrer Note If the mobile handset is logged...

Page 745: ...l DECT 900 Base connected to the internal S0 port COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets Configured and assigned internal numbers for the COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets 1 Open the page Abonnés Abo COMfortel DECT 2 Select the DECT base in the list field under Base DECT 3 Click Affecter les touches in the line of the corresponding mobile handset 4 In the first Fonction list field select one of the follo...

Page 746: ...e entries Digits and the characters and UserPIN Requires user PIN to be entered IdentNumber Requires the identification number to be entered SC Requires a short code dialling number or external number to be entered MSN MSN DDI Requires your own external numbers to be entered Numéro de téléphone Requires an external number to be entered Abonné Requires an internal subscriber number to be entered Su...

Page 747: ... other mobile handsets Copier les touches under Function keys Note The PBX begins to distribute the data to the mobile handsets in question If a mobile handset is currently not ready for the data transfer disabled out of range or busy with a call the PBX makes an attempt with the next mobile handset after a few minutes until all of the data is distributed During the data transfer duration up to tw...

Page 748: ...Requirements COMfortel DECT 900 Base connected to the internal S0 port COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets Configured and assigned internal numbers for the COMfortel DECT 900 900C Handsets 1 Open the page Abonnés Abo COMfortel DECT 2 Select the DECT base in the list field under Base DECT 3 Click Copier les touches in the line of the corresponding mobile handset A window for copying function keys open...

Page 749: ...ments should be copied 7 Click Enregistrer Note The PBX begins to distribute the data to the mobile handsets in question If a mobile handset is currently not ready for the data transfer disabled out of range or busy with a call the PBX makes an attempt with the next mobile handset after a few minutes until all of the data is distributed During the data transfer duration up to two minutes the mobil...

Page 750: ...Requirements Internal S0 port only provided on the COMmander 4 8S0 module or COMmander 4 8S0 R module available as an option Configured internal numbers for the base station Assigned internal numbers for the mobile handsets 1 Open the page Abonnés Abo COMfortel DECT 2 Select the DECT base in the list field under Base DECT 3 Click Copier les touches in the line of the corresponding mobile handset A...

Page 751: ...e the data to the mobile handsets in question If a mobile handset is currently not ready for the data transfer disabled out of range or busy with a call the PBX makes an attempt with the next mobile handset after a few minutes until all of the data is distributed During the data transfer duration up to two minutes the mobile handset is not available and Copying from PBX is shown on the display 8 C...

Page 752: ...riétés Synthèse des fonctions COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 752 Propriétés Synthèse des fonctions Settings of the Subscriber Properties Settings of the Subscriber Properties ...

Page 753: ... 06 2019 753 Settings of the Subscriber Properties Basic Settings Exchange Line Settings Reachability Authorisations Analogue Settings VoIP Settings Voicemail Fax Box Settings Basic SettingsExchange Line SettingsReachabilityAuthorisationsAnalogue SettingsVoIP SettingsVoicemail Fax BoxSettings ...

Page 754: ...ction for all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configu...

Page 755: ...tes as PINs This makes it easy for an attacker to find out the correct PIN PINs which are easy to guess such as 111111 or 123456 should also be avoided Caution Visible PINs and passwords are a security risk After entering the PIN password click on Mask PIN and password Mot de passe Freely selectable password that consists of 8 to 32 characters containing digits letters upper and lower case but no ...

Page 756: ...elines of the German Federal Office for Information Security BSI in German Caution Visible PINs and passwords are a security risk After entering the PIN password click on Mask PIN and password Mots de passe supplémentaires Configurer Requirements Enabled Subscribers may create own passwords for accessing the web server API page Abonnés Abo Tous les abonnés Enabled Les abonnés peuvent créer leurs p...

Page 757: ...iguration Manager API cannot be deleted Note After the subscriber has assigned another password he cannot go back to the original password Only the sub administrator has this authorisation Éditer les mots de passe Nouveau Adds a new entry to the list Description Enter a name for the entry Accès au serveur Web à l API The subscriber has access to the Configuration Manager API Accès aux URL d action...

Page 758: ...nregistrer By saving a new added entry the dialogue with the automatically generated password opens Nouveau mot de passe Note The password is only generated if accessing the PBX via a secure HTTPS connection The automatically generated subscriber password is displayed only once Therefore copy the subscriber password to the clipboard and then close the dialogue Connecté dans le gestionnaire de conf...

Page 759: ...aliser le statut du matériel Exécuter Requirements Subscriber is an analogue or standard ISDN phone The PBX does not automatically detect the removal of an analogue or standard ISDN phone By clicking the hardware status of the subscriber is reset on page Surveillance Statut abonnés internes ...

Page 760: ...nction for all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Config...

Page 761: ... subscriber International All international and domestic numbers can be dialled National All domestic numbers can be dialled Localité All phone numbers without a provider area code can be dialled Note If GSM access is used for an outgoing call the PBX automatically dials the phone number with the configured area code national destination code Entrants uniquement Incoming external calls can be acce...

Page 762: ...irements Configured call restrictor Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Numéros spéciaux The subscriber can not dial the phone numbers entered in the call restrictor irrespective of his exchange line authorisation So it restricts the exchange line authorisation Call deblocker outgoing business Call deblocker outgoing private Requirements Configured call deblocker Using th...

Page 763: ...nge line authorisation Preferred exchange line business ExpertsPreferred exchange line privateExperts Defines via which exchange line outgoing external calls will be routed Occupation automatique For outgoing external calls any available connection is used whereby first the fixed network connections and then the VoIP connection and at last the GSM connections were taken into account Lignes privilé...

Page 764: ...ateExperts Defines which phone number is presented Aucune The phone number is suppressed Par défaut Both the DDI parallel to the internal number and the MSN on the PTMP connection are displayed on the PTP connection over which the subscriber is called if the subscriber is not a member of the call distribution for this connection the first MSN is presented En fonction de la ligne The phone number t...

Page 765: ...the Présentation du numéro de téléphone appels sortants must be configured as Par défaut or En fonction de la ligne For the Exchange line dependent option each exchange line can have an individual number presented to the network provider or to the caller separately The number presentation to the caller is suppressed by the phone before starting a call The number presentation to the network provide...

Page 766: ...is presented back to the caller Aucune The phone number is suppressed Par défaut Both the DDI parallel to the internal number and the MSN on the PTM connection over which the subscriber is called are presented on the PTMP connection En fonction de la ligne The phone number to be presented is configured separately for each external connection under Experts Note For the option Aucune the phone servi...

Page 767: ...ion for all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configura...

Page 768: ...méros spéciaux The do not disturb function does not apply to callers who use one of the phone numbers entered in the selected call deblocker Liste noire appels entrants Requirements Configured call restrictor Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Numéros spéciaux A caller who transmitted one of the phone numbers entered in the selected call restrictor or no number is reject...

Page 769: ...CFB is executed an answering machine at the 2 nd B channel ISDN ist not called Call forwarding Paramètres appels externes uniquement External calls to the subscriber are forwarded Internal calls are not forwarded Paramètres Transfert en cascade If call forwarding has been configured for the internal destination of an existing call forwarding it is possible to reroute already forwarded calls cascad...

Page 770: ... subscriber is logged in as incoming will be forwarded to the CF destination of the subscriber Transf immédiat Numéro de téléphone composé Internal and external calls to the subscriber are forwarded immediately to the entered destination number Transf si occupé Numéro de téléphone composé Internal and external calls to the subscriber are forwarded on busy to the entered destination number Transf s...

Page 771: ...ction for all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configu...

Page 772: ...bscribers by pick up Groupe s Boîte s de messagerie vocale This subscriber may take calls of other subscribers that are members of groups the subscriber is also member of It does not make any difference if the subscriber is currently logged in or out The subscriber is authorised to take over calls from those voice mailboxes of which he is the owner If a voice mailbox has a group as its owner or us...

Page 773: ...d alarms manually Commande du système par téléphone The subscriber may change settings of the PBX e g do not disturb using a menu function key or a character string Ouvrir la porte Aucune The subscriber may not open a door Name The subscriber can phone with the selected door and open the door by pressing a key Toutes les portes The subscriber can phone with all doors and open the doors by pressing...

Page 774: ...f external calls externally The subscriber can transfer a call between two external subscribers Supprimer le détail des appels The subscriber can delete the phone number of the communication partner from the last call made to ensure that this number is not viewed by unauthorised persons CF groups Follow me The subscriber can switch group properties of groups which the subscriber is a member of swi...

Page 775: ...n for all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configurati...

Page 776: ...the phone number Note For some end devices extended CLIP information can cause problems and should therefore be disabled Durée du flashing décrocher raccrocher Hook flash timing enables the PBX to detect a flash signal from the subscriber in question For this to work the hook flash timing must correspond with the time that is configured for the flash signal on the analogue end device see the phone...

Page 777: ...the phone manual Note Note that the PBX does not detect a receiver being hanged up until after hook flash timing is finished Sonnerie pour les appels internes The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal internal calls to internal subscribers on the PBX Note See Ringtones for information about exceptions to signalling and sound sequences ...

Page 778: ...r all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configuration M...

Page 779: ...s during internal VoIP calls Chiffrement RTP Allows an exception from the default settings of the PBX for the corresponding VoIP subscriber The default setting is Adopt from Administration SIPS SRTP internal default Applying the exception is required if The corresponding phone does not support the settings of the PBX This may cause problems e g during a call being established You must circumvent t...

Page 780: ...stem phones COMfortel 3200 and COMfortel 3500 the format country code with leading sign e g 49 5306 cannot be used Propriétés intégrées au téléphone Configurer Opens the configuration of the subscriber Affecter l adresse MAC du périphérique The MAC address of a phone is needed to identify a phone that is assigned to a specific subscriber For all transactions between phone and PBX the PBX must be a...

Page 781: ...SB interface Reading e g on the menu oft the phone or on a label Note If a MAC address has been entered and assigned to a subscriber the corresponding phone can already be provided with provisioning data during its first boot process Fichier d en tête Display of the header file which is assigned to the subscriber Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Provisioning d IP Gestion des fichie...

Page 782: ...function for all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Conf...

Page 783: ...criber and the selected voice mailbox will be automatically called for all incoming calls made to the internal number of the subscriber Important The PBX supports only one central answering machine An answering machine at the COMfortel system phone will be disabled as soon as a voice mailbox is selected for the subscriber Querying and deleting voice messages as well as replaying own announcements ...

Page 784: ...warding on busy has been enabled for the subscriber on no reply on busy The voice mailbox will be called if the subscriber does not reply or if the internal number of the subscriber is busy Appel informatif fonction de messagerie vocale The arrival of new voice messages immediately after completion of the recording will be signaled by a call from the voice mailbox to the subscriber When this is do...

Page 785: ...n for all subscribers Important The settings done are only valid on the condition that they are not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place only on page Abonnés Abo Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configurati...

Page 786: ...ulated charges The phone costs calculated in this way are used in the call data list Demande préalable et surveillance de l interception d appel Requirements VoIP end device which can evaluate the available information by BLF VoIP phone from another manufacturer SIP convenience package enabled optional see Activation All information about the calls of the subscriber is available for evaluation by ...

Page 787: ...eeds will be provided 1 For incoming messages voice messages and faxes and missed calls RSS feeds will be provided After querying the RSS feeds for the subscriber a new query can be made after 15 minutes at the earliest 2 to For incoming messages voice messages and faxes and missed calls RSS feeds will be provided The RSS feed for the subscriber in the selected number can be queried without the bl...

Page 788: ...low an external subscriber to be dialled directly Flux RSS Nombre de boîtes Box X Requirements Created Voice mail fax box for the subscriber Messages of the selected boxes are provided as RSS feed Flux RSS S abonner à un flux RSS Requirements Pop up blocker which is disabled in the browser or defined exception rule When using Mozilla Firefox RSS reader RSS feeds you subscribed to are provided via ...

Page 789: ...p For some answering machines this busy signal does not interrupt a recording These answering machines cannot differentiate between the busy signal and speech For such cases the busy signal can be disabled Note See Tones for information about sound sequences Tonalité spéciale si transf Ne pas déranger appel bébé The PBX generates a special dial tone to bring attention to a configured function do n...

Page 790: ...ccordé à la ligne principale When picking up the receiver an external line is requested instantly For internal calls the prefix is required Direct exchange line request The PBX automatically distinguishes between internal and external numbers with the analysis of the digit sequence and the adjustment of the dialled phone number and the internal numbering plan Note The selection Direct exchange lin...

Page 791: ... answering machine takes a call earlier than a subscriber the subscriber may take this call back from the answering machine The answering machine will receive a busy signal then Aucune Calls of this subscriber may not be taken over Global Calls of this subscriber may be taken over by every other phone Groupe s Calls of this subscriber may be taken over by members of groups the subscriber is also m...

Page 792: ...hone Note When switched off the subscriber name entered in the PBX will be displayed on the called phone when the subscriber makes an internal call If the phone number of the subscriber has been entered in the local phone book of the called phone the subscriber name is suppressed by the phone book entry Dispositif d alarme Requirements System phone that supports signalling for alarm devices option...

Page 793: ...Téléphones non attribués COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 793 Téléphones non attribués Managing Unassigned Phones Managing Unassigned Phones ...

Page 794: ... that are not in use not connected or not assigned to a subscriber should be removed from the list Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Abonnés Abo Téléphones non attribués Select the line of the phone to be removed in the register Téléphones VoIP or Téléphones divers and click Supprimer or Assign a subscriber to a VoIP phone in the list field to the right of the corresponding V...

Page 795: ...Tous les abonnés COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 795 Tous les abonnés Settings all Subscribers Settings all Subscribers ...

Page 796: ...X uses to signalise calls to internal analogue subscribers Le abo RNIS peut changer de périphérique permuter le port The ISDN devices may be connected to any internal S0 UP0 port The PBX recognises the subscriber and moves him to another port Note When switched off an ISDN device may be plugged into another RJ socket of the internal S0 UP0 port but it has to be the same internal bus Temps d attent...

Page 797: ...over the configuration for business calls as joint configuration Note If differently configurable functions for private and business calls are enabled again the PBX takes over the settings changed since the last disabling only for business calls For this reason you will need to check the configurations for private calls Subscribers may create own passwords Subscribers may generate additional Confi...

Page 798: ...Groupes COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 798 Groupes Numéros de téléphone Profils Propriétés Numéros de téléphoneProfilsPropriétés ...

Page 799: ...Numéros de téléphone COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 799 Numéros de téléphone Management Groups Management Groups ...

Page 800: ... allocated twice Note Using numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note that chan...

Page 801: ...opriété Configurer Opens the configuration of the group Filtres The list of groups is filtered by the entered or selected value Nouveau Adds a new group You must then make the settings for this new group Note Up to 64 groups can be created Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 802: ...000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 802 Profils Management Profile Settings of the Group Profiles Settings Profile Assignment Management ProfileSettings of the Group ProfilesSettings Profile Assignment ...

Page 803: ...Using the Configuration Manager Nom de profil The available profiles default profiles user defined profiles are displayed Consulter The selected settings can be viewed default profiles Configurer The user defined profiles can be adapted to the corresponding requirements user defined profiles Nouveau Creation of a new profile ...

Page 804: ...5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 804 Settings of the Group Profiles Basic Settings Exchange Line Settings Reachability Voicemail Fax Box Settings Basic SettingsExchange Line SettingsReachabilityVoicemail Fax BoxSettings ...

Page 805: ...s fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the group setting Note When switched off the setting under Groupes Propriétés applies Schéma de sonnerie après Tous All subscribers logged in to the group will ring simultaneously Selected subscribers will start to ring after the configured delay time ...

Page 806: ...configured delay time après another single group member will be called The order of calls depends on the configured Priorité If a call was not accepted although all logged in members of the group were called the call would be finished with a busy signal Linéaire compensé groupe fractionné Only the phone of one group member will ring After the configured delay time après another single group member...

Page 807: ...rder of the calls depends on the configured Priorité First of all the member of the group first logged in gets the position 1 in the order of calls the second one the position 2 If position 1 takes a call the second call will be assigned to position 2 The member of the group with the position 1 will get the last position in the order for a future call after he has finished the current call Structu...

Page 808: ... the position 2 If position 1 takes a call the second call will be assigned to position 2 The member of the group with the position 1 will get the last position in the order for a future call after he has finished the current call If a call was not accepted although all logged in members of the group were called the call would be finished with a busy signal Structurant fixe rotatif groupe fraction...

Page 809: ...than half of the group members are ringing no members are added to this call frozen Only the remaining subscribers are added to call B If all group members are already ringing for call A the group is split for the calls The order of the calls depends on the configured Priorité First of all the member of the group first logged in gets the position 1 in the order of calls the second one the position...

Page 810: ... to display configure Function related page Groupes Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the group setting Note When switched off the setting under Groupes Propriétés applies Discrimination Experts Defines which kind of phone numbers may be dialled with a group member l...

Page 811: ...exchange line authorisation of the subscriber is used Aucune Emergency numbers can be dialled if the exchange line authorisation of the subscriber permits this Liste noire appels sortants Aucun No call restrictor is used for group members logged in as outgoing Comme les abonnés The call restrictor selected for a subscriber is used Liste blanche appels sortants Aucun No call deblocker is used for g...

Page 812: ...s abonnés The phone book authorisation activated for a subscriber is used Ligne privilégiée Experts Defines via which exchange line outgoing external calls will be routed by a group member logged in as outgoing Occupation automatique For outgoing external calls any available connection is used whereby first the fixed network connections and then the VoIP connection and at last the GSM connections ...

Page 813: ... sortants Experts Defines which phone number is presented by a group member logged in as outgoing Aucune The phone number is suppressed Par défaut Both the DDI parallel to the internal number and the MSN on the PTMP connection are displayed on the PTP connection over which the group is called if the group is not a member of the call distribution for this connection the first MSN is presented En fo...

Page 814: ...d in as outgoing Aucune The phone number is suppressed Par défaut Both the DDI parallel to the internal number and the MSN on the PTM connection over which the group is called are presented on the PTMP connection En fonction de la ligne The phone number to be presented is configured separately for each external connection under Experts Note For the option Aucune the phone service Connected Line Id...

Page 815: ...y configure Function related page Groupes Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the group setting Note When switched off the setting under Groupes Propriétés applies Discrimination Experts Defines which kind of phone numbers may be dialled with a group member logged in a...

Page 816: ... exchange line authorisation of the subscriber is used Aucune Emergency numbers can be dialled if the exchange line authorisation of the subscriber permits this Liste noire appels sortants Aucun No call restrictor is used for group members logged in as outgoing Comme les abonnés The call restrictor selected for a subscriber is used Liste blanche appels sortants Aucun No call deblocker is used for ...

Page 817: ...definition of a preferred exchange line priority 1 with overflow to other connections priority 1 possible Exchange lines with priority Aucune attribution automatique are not used for outgoing calls Comme les abonnés The preferred exchange line of the subscriber is used Note If all released connections are busy it is no longer possible to call The subscriber can only use a connection with the setti...

Page 818: ...Experts Note On a connection with a GSM gateway the phone number presentation configured in the PBX is not used because the actual phone number presentation is directly configured in the individual GSM gateway Note On a connection with Identité en départ enabled the number presentation defined here is not considered Note For the option Aucune the phone service Calling Line Identification Restricti...

Page 819: ...a ligne The phone number to be presented is configured separately for each external connection under Experts Note For the option Aucune the phone service Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR2 must be released by the network provider Note On a connection with a GSM gateway the phone number presentation configured in the PBX is not used because the actual phone number presentation is direc...

Page 820: ...e profil Select the profile you want to display configure Function related page Groupes Profils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the group setting Note When switched off the setting under Groupes Propriétés applies Messagerie vocale Type de réponse aux appels si tous déconn...

Page 821: ...f the entered delay time si occupé The voice mailbox will be called if the internal number of the subscriber is busy and if no call forwarding on busy has been enabled for the subscriber si non réponse si occupé The voice mailbox will be called if the subscriber does not reply or if the internal number of the subscriber is busy The voice mailbox will be called if all group members are logged out ...

Page 822: ...ofils Synthèse des fonctions Configurer Opens the configuration of the single function for all profiles Réglage commandé par le profil The profile setting overrides the group setting Note When switched off the setting under Groupes Propriétés applies Présentation du numéro de téléphone interne Numéros de téléphone de groupes All group members logged in as outgoing will present the group number for...

Page 823: ...facturer SIP convenience package enabled optional see Technical Data in the Instructions All information about the incoming calls of the group is available for evaluation by BLF Note When switched off no phone numbers of the group s calls are transmitted by BLF Interception de tous les appels passés aux membres du groupe A member of this group can pick up calls to the phone number of the group as ...

Page 824: ... 824 Settings Profile Assignment Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager A configuration depending profile can be assigned to each subscriber group or voice mail fax box Tous contiennent le profil The same profile is assigned to all subcribers groups or boxes for one configuration ...

Page 825: ...Propriétés COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 825 Propriétés Settings of the Group Properties Settings of the Group Properties ...

Page 826: ...5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 826 Settings of the Group Properties Basic Settings Exchange Line Settings Reachability Voicemail Fax Box Settings Basic SettingsExchange Line SettingsReachabilityVoicemail Fax BoxSettings ...

Page 827: ...n page Groupes Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Profils Note faculté libre The function is currently not overridden by a profile Note non commandé par le profil The function can not be overridden...

Page 828: ...fter receiving the first call to the group and will not restart for additional incoming calls Linéaire fixe groupe fractionné Only the phone of one group member will ring After the configured delay time après another single group member will be called The order of calls depends on the configured Priorité If a call was not accepted although all logged in members of the group were called the call wo...

Page 829: ...e next member of the group of the call order will be called immediately if a subscriber is busy In the second rotation the busy subscribers will hear knocking only from external The order of the calls depends on the configured Priorité First of all the member of the group first logged in gets the position 1 in the order of calls the second one the position 2 If position 1 takes a call the second c...

Page 830: ... Priorité First of all the member of the group first logged in gets the position 1 in the order of calls the second one the position 2 If position 1 takes a call the second call will be assigned to position 2 The member of the group with the position 1 will get the last position in the order for a future call after he has finished the current call If a call was not accepted although all logged in ...

Page 831: ...zen Only the remaining subscribers are added to call B If all group members are already ringing for call A the group is split for the calls The order of the calls depends on the configured Priorité First of all the member of the group first logged in gets the position 1 in the order of calls the second one the position 2 If position 1 takes a call the second call will be assigned to position 2 The...

Page 832: ...Status of outgoing calls Connecté Logs the phone into the group Logged out Logs the phone out of the group Connexion fixe Permanently logs the phone of a subgroup into the main group Temporisation de sonnerie Requirements Configured ringing sequence Tous or Tous groupe fractionné The subscriber rings after the configured delay time après Nouveau Selects a new group member from the configured subsc...

Page 833: ...Settings COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 833 Note Up to 40 internal subscribers or groups can be assigned to a group as members Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 834: ...The simultaneous display takes place on page Groupes Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Profils Note faculté libre The function is currently not overridden by a profile Note non commandé par le pro...

Page 835: ...ation is configured under Experts separately for each connection Comme les abonnés The exchange line authorisation of the subscriber is used Aucune Emergency numbers can be dialled if the exchange line authorisation of the subscriber permits this Liste noire appels sortants Aucun No call restrictor is used for group members logged in as outgoing Comme les abonnés The call restrictor selected for a...

Page 836: ...members logged in as outgoing can dial the phone numbers entered in the contact group Annuaire version 1 irrespective of his exchange line authorisation So it extends the exchange line authorisation Comme les abonnés The phone book authorisation activated for a subscriber is used Ligne privilégiée Experts Defines via which exchange line outgoing external calls will be routed by a group member logg...

Page 837: ... is no longer possible to call The subscriber can only use a connection with the setting Aucune attribution automatique by entering a character string see Targeted Exchange Line Access Note The same priority may be allocated to different external connections in parallel Présentation du numéro de téléphone appels sortants Experts Defines which phone number is presented by a group member logged in a...

Page 838: ...r presentation defined here is not considered Note For the option Aucune the phone service Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR2 must be released by the network provider Présentation du numéro de téléphone appels entrants Experts Defines which phone number is presented back to the caller by a group member logged in as outgoing Aucune The phone number is suppressed Par défaut Both the DDI p...

Page 839: ...cune the phone service Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR2 must be released by the network provider Note On a connection with a GSM gateway the phone number presentation configured in the PBX is not used because the actual phone number presentation is directly configured in the individual GSM gateway ...

Page 840: ...ge Groupes Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Profils Note faculté libre The function is currently not overridden by a profile Note non commandé par le profil The function can not be overridden by ...

Page 841: ...igurer Note If a call channel should be reserved for one subscriber this subscriber has to be assigned alone to a group Note A call channel reserved for a group is only available for the members of the group who are logged in the group outgoing Busy on Busy Use case Announcement before answering si occupé or Toujours is enabled The number of calls put through to the waiting loop should be limited ...

Page 842: ...e to the group is automatically corrected downwards if necessary Annonce d accueil Arrêt si occupé When calling a busy group all group members are busy the caller hears an announcement before answering for greeting After the announcement before answering the caller is put into the waiting loop and hears Music on Hold Toujours When calling a group the caller always hears the announcement before ans...

Page 843: ... Time that a group member cannot be called after an incoming internal or external call e g for Call Center agents During this time the do not disturb function is enabled for the subscriber Note The rework time can be cancelled at any time by switching off the do not disturb function e g using a function key at the system phone Liste noire appels entrants Aucun No call restrictor is used for group ...

Page 844: ...rding for a group is executed during the entire calling period independent of the ringing sequence for the group It is not executed if the group itself is the destination of a forwarded call Call Forwarding Paramètres appels externes uniquement External calls to the group are forwarded Internal calls are not forwarded Paramètres Transfert en cascade If call forwarding has been configured for the i...

Page 845: ... appel par un groupe Calls directed to a group of which the group is a member will be forwarded to the CF destination of the group Transf immédiat Numéro de téléphone composé Internal and external calls to the group are forwarded immediately to the entered destination number Transf si occupé Numéro de téléphone composé Internal and external calls to the group are forwarded on busy to the entered d...

Page 846: ...eachability COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 846 Internal and external calls to the group are forwarded to the entered destination number if all group members are logged out ...

Page 847: ...re not overridden by a profile The simultaneous display takes place on page Groupes Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Profils Note faculté libre The function is currently not overridden by a profi...

Page 848: ...ailbox will not be forwarded to a fax box Messagerie vocale Numéro de téléphone de la boîte Requirements Voice mail fax function optional see Technical Data in the Instructions Created voice mailbox for the group Both the group and the selected voice mailbox will be automatically called for all incoming calls made to the internal number of the group Important The PBX supports only one central answ...

Page 849: ...pels si tous déconnectés Temps d attente pour transf si non réponse Immédiat The voice mailbox will be called immediately si non réponse The voice mailbox will be called after expiration of the entered delay time si occupé The voice mailbox will be called if the internal number of the subscriber is busy and if no call forwarding on busy has been enabled for the subscriber si non réponse si occupé ...

Page 850: ...ofile The simultaneous display takes place on page Groupes Propriétés under Surmodulé par le biais du profil dans la configuration Note Name configuration In the displayed configuration the function is overridden by the displayed setting Configuration using the Configuration Manager page Groupes Profils Note faculté libre The function is currently not overridden by a profile Note non commandé par ...

Page 851: ...hone from another manufacturer SIP convenience package enabled optional see Technical Data in the Instructions All information about the incoming calls of the group is available for evaluation by BLF Note When switched off no phone numbers of the group s calls are transmitted by BLF Interception de tous les appels passés aux membres du groupe A member of this group can pick up calls to the phone n...

Page 852: ...s COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 852 outgoing from a group member to a caller in the caller list the phone number is deleted from the caller lists of the other group members too ...

Page 853: ...ériphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Assistant de périphériques Interphones Interfaces de paging Alarmes Relais actionneurs URL d action Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopieAssistant de périphériquesInterphonesInterfaces de pagingAlarmesRelais actionneurs URL d action ...

Page 854: ...agement Voice mail and fax boxes Management Profile Settings Profile Assignment Settings Voice of the Mail Fax Function Settings of the Voice Mailbox Settings for the Fax Box Management Voice mail and fax boxesManagement ProfileSettings Profile AssignmentSettings Voice of the Mail Fax FunctionSettings of the Voice MailboxSettings for the Fax Box ...

Page 855: ...tion Nouveau Depending on the selection a new voice mailbox or fax box will be added After that the settings for the voice mailbox fax box must be made Type Select a voice mail or fax box Numéro de téléphone or Numéro de téléphone de À This is an internal number You can select any of the numbers in the internal supply of phone numbers Single box for one owner Enter an internal phone number in the ...

Page 856: ...e exchange line access number restricts the phone numbering plan Nom Freely selectable name This name is used to identify the box within the PBX and the connected system phones Propriétaire Select the internal phone number under subscriber or group that is to be assigned to the box An owner can query the box If the administrator has not refused the access authorisation the user can perform the fol...

Page 857: ...x Exchange line settings of the subscriber or exchange line settings of the group in a group with the Discrimination Use the exchange line authorisation of the subscriber the box does not have any exchange line authorisation Only for subscribers call allowance account Note Boxes can be preconfigured by not assigning an owner to the box Nevertheless the boxes can not be used until an owner is assig...

Page 858: ...ber Example The subscribers 400 401 402 405 407 are to be assigned the boxes 7400 7401 7402 7405 7407 If the internal subscriber group numbers have 4 digits the box numbers can be created by replacing the first digit Example The subscribers 4400 4401 4402 4405 4407 are to be assigned the boxes 7400 7401 7402 7405 7407 Note The number range selected for the box numbers needs to be sufficiently larg...

Page 859: ...tomatically be enabled for the subscriber or group Requirements Configured internal subscribers and or groups The number range for the numbers of the boxes is still free A new box within the box number range de À must completely be configured Then the box can be assigned by clicking Enregistrer Affectation 1 1 Box numbers which correspond automatically for different owners are created Propriétés C...

Page 860: ...The restoration of the boxes does not include the messages box specific announcements and language files Missing data in the database on the PBX You can restore these boxes using the following data Internal number and name of the box Messages Box specific announcements Note Internal numbers must only be assigned once in the PBX The former phone number of the box to be restored cannot be used if it...

Page 861: ...ree digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note that changing the exchange line access number restricts the phone numb...

Page 862: ...Using the Configuration Manager Nom de profil The available profiles default profiles user defined profiles are displayed Consulter The selected settings can be viewed default profiles Configurer The user defined profiles can be adapted to the corresponding requirements user defined profiles Nouveau Creation of a new profile ...

Page 863: ... 863 Settings Profile Assignment Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager A configuration depending profile can be assigned to each subscriber group or voice mail fax box Tous contiennent le profil The same profile is assigned to all subcribers groups or boxes for one configuration ...

Page 864: ...anced Information V13 06 2019 864 Settings Voice of the Mail Fax Function System Information Automatic Clean Up Memory Channels Simultaneously for Outgoing Calls Language Files System InformationAutomatic Clean UpMemoryChannels Simultaneously for Outgoing CallsLanguage Files ...

Page 865: ...ion V13 06 2019 865 System Information Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Paramètres de base page Jointly for all Voice mail and fax boxes Requirements Voice Mail Fax function optional see Activation ...

Page 866: ...n V13 06 2019 866 Automatic Clean Up Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Paramètres de base Jointly for all Voice mail and fax boxes Requirements voice mail and fax function optional see Activation ...

Page 867: ... function optional see Activation Vérification automatique de la mémoire The data storage device is automatically checked for errors at the selected interval and at the selected time Note If the memory check fails this information is logged and if specified sent as an e mail Intervalle Quotidiennement The memory check will be performed daily hebdomadaire The memory check will be performed weekly m...

Page 868: ...ed Important When the inserted USB data storage device is formatted all the data currently present on it is deleted Important After the USB data storage device has been formatted with the EXT4 file system it can no longer be read on a Windows PC For this reason Windows prompts you to format the data storage device Under no circumstances should you confirm this prompt by selecting Yes Éjecter le su...

Page 869: ...ion V13 06 2019 869 Channels Simultaneously for Outgoing Calls Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Paramètres de base page Jointly for all Voice mail and fax boxes Requirements Voice Mail Fax function optional see Activation ...

Page 870: ...ion V13 06 2019 870 Language Files Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Paramètres de base page Jointly for all Voice mail and fax boxes Requirements Voice Mail Fax function optional see Activation ...

Page 871: ...000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 871 Settings of the Voice Mailbox Box Settings Users Authorisations Announcements Call Acceptance Announcements Box SettingsUsers AuthorisationsAnnouncementsCall Acceptance Announcements ...

Page 872: ... configured Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Paramètres de base Par défaut The language file is used that is set under Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Paramètres de base e g deutsch V02 01 The language of the selected language file is used Lecture automatique de nouveaux messages Note This setting does not affect querying the voice mailbox with a system phone...

Page 873: ...of the box owner is automatically used Note All pins in the PBX are unambiguous This means it is not possible to assign the same PIN twice As the PINs can also be entered by phone only numbers are allowed Réexpédition des messages Incoming new messages are forwarded to the configured destination Numéro de téléphone composé Numéro de téléphone interne External number without exchange line access nu...

Page 874: ...e second list field respectively in between 0 and 9 repetitions or minutes Transfert d appel The call take over function enables a user to take over a call which was accepted by the voice mailbox Global Every internal subscriber is permitted to take over calls Autorisés Every owner or user is permitted to take over calls If a group is owner or user every group member can take over calls Maximum re...

Page 875: ... unlimited maximum memory utilisation Note Under the following circumstances the entered value is not available to the box There is not enough memory capacity available on the storage media There is not enough memory capacity available on the storage media Automatic clean up Effectuer à capacité mémoire If the maximum number of stored messages or the maximum recording capacity of the box between 5...

Page 876: ... text format Send on incoming messages Attach incoming messages as file In the case of an incoming message this information is sent as an e mail Fichier audio au format MP3 The audio file is provided in MP3 format Note When switched off the audio file is provided in wav format Marquer le message envoyé comme lu In the message list a sent message is marked as read Envoyer si capacité mémoire Enter ...

Page 877: ...ed under Administration Courrier électronique Internationalisation Nouveau a user defined language file and select it the e mails will be sent with the text modules of the selected language file Logo Logo par défaut The default logo is used Name Logo The selected logo is used Message recipients Envoi de courrier électronique Test The e mail addresses of up to 10 message recipients can be entered f...

Page 878: ...er under Administration Configuration IP Configured outgoing mail server under Administration Courrier électronique Serveur du courrier sortant Note The PBX enters sent e mails in a log file page Surveillance Messages système Note E mails sent by the PBX may be treated as spam mail by the recipient of the message ...

Page 879: ...gned to it page Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Numéros de téléphone In addition to the owner further users can be assigned to the box Requirements Configured internal subscribers and or groups Note An owner is automatically entered as a user with all authorisations Note All group members have the authorisations assigned to the group If a group member or a subgroup is also ente...

Page 880: ...uthoristaions of the announcemens are expanded Recording storing in the PBX reading from the PBX downloading listening to and deleting of announcements Properties of the box under Réponse aux appels Annonce which are not controlled via a profile Administrer les paramètres The authorisations of the properties of the box that are not controlled via a profile are expanded except for User authorisatio...

Page 881: ... via character string see Voice Mailbox Upload new recorded announcement You can save up to 10 announcements audio files wav lasting a maximum of 3 minutes each for each voice mailbox in the PBX The audio files wav must have the following properties Format 16 kHz 16 bit PCM mono or 8 kHz 8 bit mono A law File name up to 32 characters Note On the German Auerswald Internet page audio files can be co...

Page 882: ...he file on the PC Dicter l annonce Dicter Announcements for voice mailboxes can directly be recorded via the receiver of an internal phone Utilisateur The phone is called Sub administrator administrator Select the phone via the list field Record announcement at the subscriber The phone is called The call must be accepted and after the tone an announcemnet can be recorded Rename announcement Modifi...

Page 883: ...lité sur Switches the readiness on Arrêt Switches readiness off dépendant de la configuration The setting made in the profile page Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Profils Configuration assigned to the currently valid configuration will apply Assistant personnel Requirements Corresponding announcement saved in the PBX Enabled Disponibilité of the voice mailbox Note This setting ...

Page 884: ...Select an announcemnet that is replayed for callers if the deputy function is enabled Réponse aux appels Annonce The call acceptance of the voice mailbox can be configured to show different behaviour for different call types The Réponse aux appels Annonce defines the standard behaviour for the case that no Comportement spécifique à l appel applies Requirements Disponibilité enabled Disabled Replac...

Page 885: ...controlled via Comportement spécifique à l appel will be accepted The announcement of the selected language file will be replayed see Langue des annonces under Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Propriétés Paramètres de boîte Annonce de la boîte Select one of the available options in the list field on the right Enregistrement The caller can leave a message and the option Enregistr...

Page 886: ...set in a configuration by means of a profile the corresponding table can be viewed Click the corresponding profile name which is displayed in red font The corresponding profile configuration is displayed Requirements Separately for voice mailboxes Separately for configurations Using the Configuration Manager Note This setting is also possible configuration dependent via profiles Périphériques Boît...

Page 887: ...der Comportement par défaut aucune réponse aux appels No reaction on calls the caller hears the call tone Rejeter l appel The caller hears the busy signal subscriber group will not be called additionally or the call tone subscriber group will be called Default announcement The announcement of the selected language file will be replayed see Langue des annonces under Périphériques Boîtes de messager...

Page 888: ...Announcements COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 888 Enregistrement The caller can leave a message The setting for Enregistrer des messages courts also applies to the call specific behaviour ...

Page 889: ...gs for the Fax Box COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 889 Settings for the Fax Box Box Settings Users Authorisations Call Acceptance Box SettingsUsers AuthorisationsCall Acceptance ...

Page 890: ...g the fax transfer and thus permits an exact identification of the sender Note Recipients of a fax frequently send their responses to the number entered in the header of the fax Therefore the number under Numéro de fax numéro de téléphone should be one of your own extensions phone numbers with fax acceptance Enter a sender name that is to be inserted into the top line of a fax along with the fax I...

Page 891: ...e transmission errors occurred will be displayed as erroneous dots or lines 9 600 baud maximum The transmission rate of a fax will be adapted in such a way that a faultless transmission quality will be reached where possible Note The PBX supports a maximum transmission rate of 14400 baud This transmission rate may be too high for specific lines e g overseas lines or VoIP connections and may lead t...

Page 892: ...ean up Effectuer à capacité mémoire If the maximum number of stored messages or the maximum recording capacity of the box between 50 and 95 is reached the oldest messages marked as read will be deleted as soon as new messages arrive Archived messages will not be deleted Note If the clean up fails this information will be logged and if necessary sent as e mail E mail transfer Requirements Configure...

Page 893: ...Marquer le message envoyé comme lu Important If automatic marking as read is enabled the fax box will be cleaned up automatically This option should normally be enabled Envoyer si capacité mémoire Enter a value between 50 and 90 When the amount of memory used exceeds the specified level this information is sent as an e mail Send in the case of failure of automatic clean up If the automatic clean u...

Page 894: ...ax transfer Attach sent message to file Modèle linguistique Select the language file Note If you have created under Administration Courrier électronique Internationalisation Nouveau a user defined language file and select it the e mails will be sent with the text modules of the selected language file Logo Logo par défaut The default logo is used Name logo The selected logo is used Message recipien...

Page 895: ...r the e mail transfer to the message recipients entered works without fault Requirements Configured DNS server under Administration Configuration IP Configured outgoing mail server under Administration Courrier électronique Serveur du courrier sortant Note The PBX enters sent e mails in a log file page Surveillance Messages système Note E mails sent by the PBX may be treated as spam mail by the re...

Page 896: ...d to it page Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Numéros de téléphone In addition to the owner further users can be assigned to the box Note An owner is automatically entered as a user with all authorisations Note All group members have the authorisations assigned to the group If a group member or a subgroup is also entered individually as a user the authorisations assigned to this...

Page 897: ...is required select the user in the first list field If more than more user is required they are to be selected via both list fields from to Administrer les paramètres The authorisations of the properties of the box that are not controlled via a profile are expanded except for User authorisations Maximum recording capacity and Numéro de fax ...

Page 898: ...it page Périphériques Boîtes de messagerie vocale télécopie Numéros de téléphone In addition to the owner further users can be assigned to the box Note An owner is automatically entered as a user with all authorisations Note All group members have the authorisations assigned to the group If a group member or a subgroup is also entered individually as a user the authorisations assigned to this user...

Page 899: ... required select the user in the first list field If more than more user is required they are to be selected via both list fields from to Administrer les paramètres The authorisations of the properties of the box that are not controlled via a profile are expanded except for User authorisations Maximum recording capacity and Numéro de fax ...

Page 900: ...Assistant de périphériques COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 900 Assistant de périphériques Management of the Device Wizard Management of the Device Wizard ...

Page 901: ... Door Terminals Configuring Analogue Door Terminals Configuring VoIP Door Terminal Configurig IP Switch Relays Configuring Loudspeaker Announcements Online Configuration Device WizardDoor TerminalsConfiguring Analogue Door TerminalsConfiguring VoIP Door TerminalConfigurig IP Switch RelaysConfiguring Loudspeaker AnnouncementsOnline Configuration ...

Page 902: ...s Configurer Nom Freely selectable name maximum of 16 characters Modèle de périphérique Select the device template corresponding to the device Module Select the module on that the device is connected Port Port to which the device is connected Nouveau A new device template is created Supprimer Deletes the entries that are marked in the list Gestion des fichiers List of all device templates ...

Page 903: ...R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 903 Import a new device template in XML format The device template is saved as an xml file to the data storage device PC Configurer Opens the configuration of the device template ...

Page 904: ...tch inputs of the door terminal by selecting call destinations To detect their actuation e g because a door bell button has been pressed the PBX needs to know which DTMF sequence or which SIP invite the door terminal sends when a button is pressed see manual and settings of the device in question Note The DTMF sequence or the SIP invite usually is the phone number assigned to the door bell button ...

Page 905: ...s authentication data user name and password to control the relays see manual and settings of the device in question Various door terminals supported by the PBX are available as device templates They already include several default values for operation of the door terminals in their factory settings If no of the device templates on offer matches your installation you can select a user defined devi...

Page 906: ...f the relays and switch inputs Séquence DTMF Requirements Expert settings Enter the request that is assigned to the door bell button within the door terminal Possible entries Digits and characters Possible entries Numéro de téléphone composé Select or enter the required call destination external number short code number internal number of the individual phone internal number of the group Note The ...

Page 907: ...d also be executed via VoIP accounts or GSM gateways in any case the external number must be entered with the corresponding city code even if it is the local prefix Note To create further configurations for a door terminal open the page Périphériques Interphones and click Configurer in the line of the corresponding door terminal ...

Page 908: ...y the connected device Configuration IP Adresse IP Enter the IP address required by the connected device Possible entries IP address with a range of 0 to 255 example 192 168 0 240 Port Enter the port required by the connected device Possible entries 1 to 65535 Nom d utilisateur Enter the user name authentication data to control the relays Mot de passe Enter the password authentication data to cont...

Page 909: ...e executed via VoIP accounts or GSM gateways in any case the external number must be entered with the corresponding city code even if it is the local prefix Note To create further configurations for a door terminal open the page Périphériques Interphones and click Configurer in the line of the corresponding door terminal Invite SIP Enter the SIP invites which the connected door terminal uses as si...

Page 910: ... name optional and password of the connected device see manual and settings of the device in question Various IP switch relays supported by the PBX are available as device templates They already include several default values for operation of the IP switch relays in their factory settings If no of the device templates on offer matches your installation you can select a user defined device template...

Page 911: ...A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 911 Note Normally the default port is port 80 Nom d utilisateur Enter the user name required by the connected device Mot de passe Enter the password required by the connected device Relay X Nom Enter the names of the relays ...

Page 912: ...he device wizard Various devices supported by the PBX that can be used as announcement output are available as device templates for this purpose Their factory settings already include several default values for operation of the announcement outputs If no of the device templates on offer matches your installation you can select a user defined device template If you use the announcement output of a ...

Page 913: ... supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note that changing the exchange line access number restricts the phone numbering plan Relay X Nom Enter the names of the relay...

Page 914: ...13 06 2019 914 Online Configuration Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Assistant de périphériques Configurer IMPORTING DEVICE TEMPLATE A device template is either imported from the Internet Charger config or from a file Importer du fichier ...

Page 915: ... R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 915 Interphones Management of the Door Terminal Settings of the Door Terminal Settings Door Call Management of the Door TerminalSettings of the Door TerminalSettings Door Call ...

Page 916: ...Management of the Door Terminal COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 916 Management of the Door Terminal Door Calls Relays Door Calls Relays ...

Page 917: ...ced Information V13 06 2019 917 Door Calls Relays Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Interphones Relais Link to the page Périphériques Relais actionneurs Deletes the relay or opens the configuration of the relay Türrufe ...

Page 918: ...Settings of the Door Terminal COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 918 Settings of the Door Terminal Configuration of the Door Terminal Configuration of the Door Terminal ...

Page 919: ...vanced Information V13 06 2019 919 Configuration of the Door Terminal Proceed as follows Separately for door terminals Using the Configuration Manager page Périphériques Interphones Configurer Requirements Created door terminal Analogue door terminal VoIP Door Terminal ...

Page 920: ...phone Select the door call you want to configure Séquence DTMF Requirements Created switch input for an analogue device Specifies which DTMF sequence the PBX detects for example as the actuation of a door bell button to then trigger an alarm or a door call For information about which DTMF sequences the connected device sends see the manual of the device in question Note The DTMF sequence usually i...

Page 921: ...Note The SIP invite usually is the phone number assigned to the door bell button within the door terminal Numéro de téléphone composé Proceed as follows Separately for configurations Select the destination number you want to assign to a door call Sonnerie Proceed as follows Separately for configurations The ringtone specifies which sequence of sounds is used to signal door calls to internal subscr...

Page 922: ... of the external connection and even of the phone number to be presented Tous les raccordements externes ou internes Door calls can be made on internal or on all external channels External connection Door calls will be made on the selected external connection In the DDI entry field enter the DDI to be presented from the extensions block under the corresponding slot If the DDI is displayed in red f...

Page 923: ...anced Information V13 06 2019 923 A second ringer can additionally be installed at locations where ringing of the phone will not always be heard It will then be triggered by a relay with the operating mode second ringer which is assigned to the door call ...

Page 924: ... paging COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 924 Interfaces de paging Management Announcement Output Settings Announcement Output Management Announcement OutputSettings Announcement Output ...

Page 925: ...y an internal subscriber Entry on page Périphériques Assistant de périphériques Note A number cannot be allocated twice Note Using numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchang...

Page 926: ...lais Requirements Relay actuator optional see Technical Data in the Instructions A relay with the operating mode Parler which is enabled during the loudspeaker announcement is assigned to the alarm This relay can be used to switch over the loudspeaker area of the loudspeaker system for example or to switch on an additional lamp which draws attention to the announcement If suitable relays have alre...

Page 927: ...7 Note Alternatively you can also create and assign relays on the page Périphériques Relais actionneurs Note For a detailed description of the operating modes refer to Relay Operating Modes Link to the page Périphériques Relais actionneurs Deletes the relay or opens the configuration of the relay ...

Page 928: ...nt to configure Activer la connexion Terminer la connexion Specifies which DTMF sequences the PBX uses to control the analogue announcement outputs to enable or terminate the connection For information about which DTMF sequences the connected device requires see the manual of the device in question Note You can use the comma character as a pause of half a second Temps mort Specifies how many milli...

Page 929: ...Settings Announcement Output COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 929 again after receiving DTMF sequences see the manual of the device in question ...

Page 930: ...OMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 930 Alarmes Management of the Alarms Settings Alarm Settings of the Switch Inputs Management of the AlarmsSettings AlarmSettings of the Switch Inputs ...

Page 931: ...m Select Nouveau to enter Note A number cannot be allocated twice Note Using numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory se...

Page 932: ...nitiated only once Subsequently the alarm input will be disabled and will have to be enabled once again Toujours After an alarm is triggered off the alarm input continues to be enabled A further alarm can be triggered off Configurer Opens the configuration of the alarm Nouveau Adds a new alarm You must then make the settings for this new alarm Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 933: ...he alarm In the list field select one of the existing relays and click If you do not want to use any of the existing relays select Nouveau relais in the list field cancels the operation Enter a freely selectable name for the relay and select the device as whose part the relay is to be created in the Ajouter à list field Click Ok Note The relay remains part of this other device e g door terminal IP...

Page 934: ...t want to use any of the existing switch inputs select Nouvelle entrée de signal in the list field cancels the operation Enter a freely selectable name for the switch input and select the device as whose part the switch input is to be created in the Ajouter à list field Enter a value under Séquence DTMF for analogue door terminals or Invite SIP for VoIP door terminals To detect that the alarm has ...

Page 935: ...ation V13 06 2019 935 Click Ok Note The switch input remains part of this other device e g door terminal in the configuration of the PBX but takes over the selected alarm function for the alarm Deletes the switch input or opens the configuration of the switch input ...

Page 936: ...the alarm you want to configure Activer alarme Arrêt The alarm input is disabled It is not possible to initiate an alarm une fois The alarm can be initiated only once Subsequently the alarm input will be disabled and will have to be enabled once again Toujours After an alarm is triggered off the alarm input continues to be enabled A further alarm can be triggered off Exécutions d alarme Specifies ...

Page 937: ...hort code dialling number Internal number of the individual phone Internal number of the group Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note You can set the display text that will be displayed if an alarm call is made to the internal subscribers which have been selected as alarm subscribers here page Fonctions Textes CLIP Choi...

Page 938: ... triggered on the switch input before the first alarm loop starts Temps d attente d alarme 0 99 Specifies how many seconds elapse before an alarm is repeated if it has not been acknowledged URL d action démarrage The Action URL will be assigned to the alarm type Démarrage alarme When an alarm is triggered the Action URL is sent Note If an alarm delay time was entered the alarm call via the Action ...

Page 939: ...ion expiration The Action URL will be assigned to the alarm type Expiration alarme If none of the alarm subscribers acknowledges the alarm the alarm call ends after the set alarm loops and the Action URL is sent Alarme déclenchable par une URL d action Provided that the access authorisation to Action URLs is granted system wide or for a subscriber the individual alarm can be triggered by Action UR...

Page 940: ...Settings of the Switch Inputs COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 940 Settings of the Switch Inputs Switch Input Relay Switch Input Relay ...

Page 941: ...o be configured Séquence DTMF Requirements Created switch input for an analogue device Specifies which DTMF sequence the PBX detects for example as the actuation of a door bell button to then trigger an alarm or a door call For information about which DTMF sequences the connected device sends see the manual of the device in question Note The DTMF sequence usually is the phone number assigned to th...

Page 942: ...e PBX detects for example as the actuation of a door bell button to then trigger an alarm or a door call For information about which SIP invite the connected device sends see the manual of the device in question Note The SIP invite usually is the phone number assigned to the door bell button within the door terminal ...

Page 943: ...nneurs COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 943 Relais actionneurs Management Relays Actuators Settings of the Relays Actuators Management Relays Actuators Settings of the Relays Actuators ...

Page 944: ... Identification number of the relay which is automatically assigned when a new relay is created Module Select the module on that the device is connected Port Port to which the device is connected Type de fonctionnement Select an operating mode Note Relays can have various functions on the PBX For a detailed description see here Relays Actuators Note To learn how you can assign a door call to a rel...

Page 945: ...7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 945 utilisé par Assigns a device to the relay Nouveau A new relay is created and assigned to a device Supprimer Deletes the entries that are marked in the list Configurer Opens the configuration of the device template ...

Page 946: ...Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 946 Settings of the Relays Actuators Analogue Door Terminal VoIP Door Terminal IP Switch Relay Loudspeaker Announcements Analogue Door TerminalVoIP Door TerminalIP Switch RelayLoudspeaker Announcements ...

Page 947: ... with the operating modes Light Door opener Alarm and PC relay after the specified switching duration Note When switched off the hold time of the relay will be used The PBX does not actively switch off the relay Note As a a pre requisite off control must be supported by the relay for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled Plages horaires The switching duration...

Page 948: ...he PBx for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled the hold time of the relay can be used instead of the switching duration This will only make sense if the hold time of the relay is sufficiently long for example for a door opener The PBX needs to know how long the relay will be held in order to signalise holding of the relay on the system phones see the manual...

Page 949: ...ithout affecting the PBX In some situations e g if the PBX is switched off at the switching point the PBX cannot identify the state of the relay The PBX restores the relay to the last state it was able to identify after it is rebooted Commande d arrêt Requirements the relay must have been set up The PBX will switch off relays with the operating modes Light Door opener Alarm and PC relay after the ...

Page 950: ... the specified switching duration off control must be supported by the relay and be switched on for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled Alternatively the hold time of the relay can be used Délai de rétention If switching off is not to be controlled by the PBx for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled the hold time of t...

Page 951: ...switched on for the relay Enter the hold time of the relay in milliseconds Possible entries 10 to 10000 ms Relais déclenchable par URL d action Provided that the access authorisation to Action URLs is granted system wide or for a subscriber the individual manual relay can be triggered by Action URLs ...

Page 952: ...out affecting the PBX In some situations e g if the PBX is switched off at the switching point the PBX cannot identify the state of the relay The PBX restores the relay to the last state it was able to identify after it is rebooted Commande d arrêt Requirements the relay must have been set up The PBX will switch off relays with the operating modes Light Door opener Alarm and PC relay after the spe...

Page 953: ...he specified switching duration off control must be supported by the relay and be switched on for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled Alternatively the hold time of the relay can be used Délai de rétention If switching off is not to be controlled by the PBx for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled the hold time of the...

Page 954: ...itched on for the relay Enter the hold time of the relay in milliseconds Possible entries 10 to 10000 ms Relais déclenchable par URL d action Provided that the access authorisation to Action URLs is granted system wide or for a subscriber the individual manual relay can be triggered by Action URLs ...

Page 955: ...ays with the operating modes Light Door opener Alarm and PC relay after the specified switching duration Note When switched off the hold time of the relay will be used The PBX does not actively switch off the relay Note As a a pre requisite off control must be supported by the relay for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled Plages horaires The switching durat...

Page 956: ... the PBx for some relays e g the a b Switching Modules switching off cannot be controlled the hold time of the relay can be used instead of the switching duration This will only make sense if the hold time of the relay is sufficiently long for example for a door opener The PBX needs to know how long the relay will be held in order to signalise holding of the relay on the system phones see the manu...

Page 957: ...d analogue relay Specifies how many milliseconds the pbx will wait before it sends DTMF sequences to the connected device again Possible entries 0 to 10000 milliseconds Commuter The PBX uses DTMF sequences to control the analogue relays For this purpose the PBX needs to know which DTMF sequences the connected device requires to switch the relay on or off see the manual of the device in question Re...

Page 958: ...5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 958 URL d action Management of the Action URLs HTTP Request Settings Action URL HTTP Request Management of the Action URLs HTTP Request Settings Action URL HTTP Request ...

Page 959: ...s HTTP Request COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 959 Management of the Action URLs HTTP Request Action URLs Incoming Action URLs Outgoing Event Type Action URLs Incoming Action URLs Outgoing Event Type ...

Page 960: ...e Internet Service Developer Nouveau Adds a new Action URL You must then make the settings for this new Action URL Supprimer Deletes the entries that are marked in the list URL d action entrantes actives System wide access Requirement for the following settings URL d action uniquement au sein du réseau local Triggered exclusively on the local network Les abonnés peuvent créer leurs propres mots de...

Page 961: ...onal passwords can also be created for individual subscribers Abonnés Abo Numéros de téléphone Configurer Paramètres de base Page for editing additional passwords Accès aux URL d action System wide access Enregistrer Displays the automatically created passwords that is only displayed once Therefore it should be copied to the clipboard Note When switched off the password is only created when access...

Page 962: ...ing of an alarm etc in the Internet Service Developer Nouveau Adds a new Action URL You must then make the settings for this new Action URL Supprimer Deletes the entries that are marked in the list Nom Freely selectable name to identify the Action URL within the PBX URL d action Protocol IP URL and command must be understood by the receiving device example http phoneIP remote_control action HANGUP...

Page 963: ...vice Developer Nouveau Adds a new Action URL You must then make the settings for this new Action URL Supprimer Deletes the entries that are marked in the list Alarme In the first list feld select one of the existing alarms select the alarm type in the second list field and click If you do not want to use any of the existing alarms select Nouvelle alarme in the list field cancels the operation Ente...

Page 964: ...e Note Using numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of numbers that require more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 to 129 and 1200 to 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the PBX is 0 in the factory settings However this can be changed Note that changing the exchan...

Page 965: ... confirmée As soon as an alarm subscriber configured under Devices Alarms Configure Alarm subscriber destination number acknowlegded the alarm the Action URL is sent Note A device that is not recognized by the PBX cannot acknowlegde an alarm call by entering the DTMF digit 0 Alarm timeout The Action URL will be assigned to the alarm type Expiration alarme If none of the alarm subscribers acknowled...

Page 966: ...ger page Périphériques URL d action Configurer Requirements Configured Action URL Configuration de l URL d action Select the alarm you want to configure Nom d utilisateur Enter the device s username that shall be reached via the Action URL Mot de passe Enter the password that belongs to the username Réponse requise A message concerning the Action URL that is was sent is displayed Monitoring System...

Page 967: ...Calendriers COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 967 Calendriers Configurations Plages horaires ConfigurationsPlages horaires ...

Page 968: ...Configurations COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 968 Configurations Management Configuration Management Configuration ...

Page 969: ...BX internal clock Note If automatic configuration switchover is enabled the configuration enabled under Time control Switching times for the current time becomes active If a different configuration is then switched manually this remains active until the next switching time Controllable with system relay Aut Konfig um 900 Requirements Automatic configuration switchover is enabled Automatic configur...

Page 970: ... type under Synthèses Plan de répartition des numéros d identification activer The selected configuration is switched on Note To switch off a configuration switch on a different configuration Nouveau Adds a new configuration to the list The settings made for the existing configuration are copied You must then make the individual settings for the configuration Supprimer Deletes the entries marked i...

Page 971: ...Plages horaires COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 971 Plages horaires Management Switching Times Management Switching Times ...

Page 972: ... Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Calendrier Heure Time format hh mm when the selected configuration is to be activated Select Nouveau to enter Note A configuration applies until another configuration manual or automatic is enabled also beyond the daily change An exception is the transition from a holiday to a normal weekday In this case the configuration activated for the holiday wi...

Page 973: ...ake up announcement the user hears when accepting a wake up call Three wake up announcements are available to indicate the time of day Nouveau Adds a new switching time to the list For this switching time settings must be configured Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list Copier Switching times are copied from one weekday to other selected weekdays ...

Page 974: ...Routage COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 974 Routage Soft LCR 4 0 Routage VoIP GSM Soft LCR 4 0Routage VoIP GSM ...

Page 975: ...0 Management LCR Subscribers Management LCR Providers Management Networks and LCR import Management Area Codes Area Code Ranges Management LCR Tables Management LCR SubscribersManagement LCR ProvidersManagement Networks and LCR importManagement Area Codes Area Code RangesManagement LCR Tables ...

Page 976: ...ed als follows Using the Configuration Manager page Routage Soft LCR 4 0 Abonnés LCR Numéro de téléphone Nom Requirements Enabled LCR subscribers Select the subscribers for whom automatic LCR is to be carried out Select Nouveau to enter Nouveau Adds a new subscriber to the list Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 977: ...mètres de ligne Note Manual LCR by dialling a preceding provider area code is always possible if the network provider supports dial around service Indicatif du fournisseur Provider area code without an exchange line access number Select Nouveau to enter Nom du fournisseur Freely selectable name This name is used to identify the provider within the PBX Select Nouveau to enter Nouveau Adds a new pro...

Page 978: ...ité Region National and International can automatically be created based on the local area code The include the data for the Area code Area code range Important When networks are created automatically the existing LCR data is deleted Nom Freely selectable name This name is used to identify the network within the PBX Select Nouveau to enter Configurer Opens the configuration of the networks and the...

Page 979: ...on file xml txt also compressed gz that is stored on a PC data storage device Note Using special tariff calculators you can calculate an LCR configuration provider tariff groups and data and import this into the PBX e g Telefonsparbuch de Important When importing configuration data existing LCR data is deleted Exporter A completed LCR configuration is saved to a data storage device in a gz file ...

Page 980: ...tifs Digit sequence for an area code or area code range Select Neu to enter A prefix contains the prefix or all of the prefixes from the area that should be collected for the network e g local phone network regional network international network Nom Freely selectable name This name is used for identification within the PBX Nouveau Adds a new area code area code range to the list Up to 1000 entries...

Page 981: ... Fonctions Calendrier Weekdays when dialling is to be carried out using the corresponding provider Heure Time point starting on the corresponding Jour when the dial attempt is to be carried out via the corresponding provider Select Nouveau to enter Fournisseur Aucun LCR The dial attempt is initiated without a provider area code Émettre tonalité occupée The dial attempt is ended and a busy signal i...

Page 982: ... of a connection based on the currency entered in the PBX page Fonctions Crédits de communication Prix par minute Proceed as follows Separately for main provider 1st and 2nd fallback provider The PBX uses Prix par minute for internal calculations and display purposes during calls that are initiated by an LCR subscriber and perhaps a Call Through user and routed via the corresponding provider The P...

Page 983: ... Mesure suivante Proceed as follows Separately for main provider 1st and 2nd fallback provider Charge pulse time unit used to bill a call after the first metering pulse Note For second pulses of differing lengths enter the most unfavourable meter pulse Note The provider bills each started meter pulse in full Nouveau Adds a new LCR table to the list Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 984: ...Routage VoIP GSM COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 984 Routage VoIP GSM Settings for VoIP GSM Routing Settings for VoIP GSM Routing ...

Page 985: ... VoIP GSM Routing COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 985 Settings for VoIP GSM Routing Exception Numbers Routing Configuration Dependent Exception NumbersRouting Configuration Dependent ...

Page 986: ... Do not enter the phone numbers for software updates system phone etc numbers as exception numbers Nom Freely selectable name This name is used to identify the exception number within the PBX 1 Numérotation 2 Numérotation 3 Numérotation Select the connection to be used for the exception number émettre tonalité occupée The dial attempt is ended and a busy signal is issued Tous les raccordements aux...

Page 987: ...counts VoIP All GSM lines The dialling is carried out by one of the external ports with GSM gateway of the configured ISDN PTMP connections or ISDN PTP connections GSM PBX base number extensions block DDIs Name of connection The dialling is carried out by the GSM gateway at the selected external port of the ISDN PTP connection GSM Slot x Port No Name of connection The dialling is carried out by th...

Page 988: ...er A text file e g txt csv data arranged in rows and separated by semicolons stored on a PC data storage device is selected and imported in the columns Numéro de téléphone Zone and Nom Note The option Tous les raccordements aux lignes fixes under 1 Numérotation or the option émettre tonalité occupée for the 2 Numérotation and 3 Numérotation is selected for the imported phone numbers This must be m...

Page 989: ...Using the Configuration Manager page Routage Routage VoIP GSM Routing configuration dependent Configurations Name Pour toutes les configurations In case that the selected provider has low prices only for a limited space of time you can switch on and off single exception numbers by configuration Configuration during which the exception number is used ...

Page 990: ...nication Fonction Hôtel Calendrier LAN TAPI Parçage d appels Recherche de nom en ligne File d attente Music on Hold and Announcements Heures de réveil Prise de la ligne principaleStandard automatiques SVIDISA Call Through Textes CLIPShort Code MacrosCrédits de communicationFonction HôtelCalendrierLAN TAPIParçage d appelsRecherche de nom en ligneFile d attenteMusic on Hold and AnnouncementsHeures d...

Page 991: ...Prise de la ligne principale COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 991 Prise de la ligne principale Settings for Exchange Line Transfer Settings for Exchange Line Transfer ...

Page 992: ...ocker outgoing for the manually switched exchange line access will be configured specifically for this purpose Appliquer le profile du poste transférant la ligne The exchange line settings for the manually switched exchange line access are set depending on the transferring subscriber Option de rappel The requesting subscriber can trigger a callback after initiating an external call Imputation des ...

Page 993: ... for Exchange Line Transfer COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 993 Specifies how many minutes the exchange line access will persist at maximum if a call is not initiated successfully ...

Page 994: ...VI COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 994 Standard automatiques SVI Management Automatic Reception Settings for Automatic Receptions Management Automatic ReceptionSettings for Automatic Receptions ...

Page 995: ...nced Information V13 06 2019 995 Management Automatic Reception Using the Configuration Manager page Seite Fonctions Standard automatiques SVI Requirements Activated function Automatic Reception optional see Activation Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 996: ...Settings for Automatic Receptions COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 996 Settings for Automatic Receptions Settings Destination Number SettingsDestination Number ...

Page 997: ...7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 997 Settings Proceed as follows Separately for Automatic Receptions Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Standard automatiques SVI Configurer Requirements A configured automatic reception ...

Page 998: ...7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 998 Destination Number Proceed as follows Separately for Automatic Receptions Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Standard automatiques SVI Configurer Requirements A configured automatic reception ...

Page 999: ...DISA Call Through COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 999 DISA Call Through Settings for Call Through Settings for Call Through ...

Page 1000: ...ll Through COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1000 Settings for Call Through Exchange Line Settings Call Assignment Call Through User Exchange Line SettingsCall AssignmentCall Through User ...

Page 1001: ...service provider is determined PIN pour les appels DISA In the case of a call the PIN of the caller is transmitted via DTMF The PIN is then compared with the Call Through PIN Note The transmission of the phone number is required Therefore anonymous callers do not get a Call Through authorisation Note If the PIN is locked the access is only locked for the Call Through subscriber who made the misent...

Page 1002: ...tres de ligne spéciaux Configurer You can make the following exchange line settings for internal subscribers but also for Call Through calls Exchange line authorisation Call restrictor outgoing Call deblocker outgoing Preferred exchange line Number presentation outgoing Number presentation incoming ...

Page 1003: ...n d écran configured for the VoIP provider as evaluation type of incoming SIP messages Using the Configuration Manager page Réseaux publics VoIP Fournisseur Configurer Select the external phone number that the Call Through user must dial to call the PBX for Call Through Note Call Through numbers are not included in call distribution and cannot be diverted Nombre maximum Specifies how many how many...

Page 1004: ...nets d adresses Contacts et affectation Select the Call Through user according to its display name Select Nouveau to enter Note Call Through is automatically configured for each of the four phone numbers that can be entered for each contact but only for a total of 400 contacts Liste noire blanche If call restrictor and deblocker for Call Through are configured the phone number dialled by the Call ...

Page 1005: ...Call Through User COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1005 Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 1006: ...Textes CLIP COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1006 Textes CLIP Settings CLIP Texts Settings CLIP Texts ...

Page 1007: ...Appels d alarme The configured CLIP text is displayed on system phones during an alarm call Appels de réveil The configured CLIP text is displayed on analogue phones during a wake up call Exchange line reservation The configured CLIP text is displayed on analogue phones during a call to signal that a line that was previously busy has become available TAPI The configured CLIP text is displayed on a...

Page 1008: ...V13 06 2019 1008 Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Textes CLIP Requirements System phone or analogue phone with alphanumerical CLIP information Phone number display CLIP Infos CLIP and Infos CLIP étendues enabled for the analogue subscriber ...

Page 1009: ...Short Code Macros COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1009 Short Code Macros Management Macro Short Code Number Management Macro Short Code Number ...

Page 1010: ... short code macros with postdialling could have problems with the length check so that the area code must always be dialled Note The replacement of an internal number by another internal number is not supported Note It is not possible to integrate a macro into another macro Macro types Simple digit sequence that is replaced by the macro short code 0 9 Character sequence that by dialling the macro ...

Page 1011: ... be connected to the subscriber who triggered it Macros de numérotation abrégée Note A short code number must not begin with 0 or the exchange line access number For example the internal number 60 for the pick up sequence 06 Nom de la macro For example Pick up Macro sequence Digit sequence e g 06 or sequence of macro commands that are selected or triggered by the short code Nouveau Supprimer Docum...

Page 1012: ...Crédits de communication COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1012 Crédits de communication Settings of the Call Allowance Account Settings of the Call Allowance Account ...

Page 1013: ...all Allowance Account COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1013 Settings of the Call Allowance Account Charges Account Debit Call Allowance Accounts ChargesAccount DebitCall Allowance Accounts ...

Page 1014: ...CR 4 0 Nom de la devise Specifies which abbreviation is used for the currency in the Configuration Manager e g EUR for Euros Prix par unité Is used for internal calculations and the display The value refers to the currency entered e g EUR 0 0600 for 6 cents Note For Least Cost Routing LCR the tariff information of dial around providers is saved in the PBX This data prices charge pulse interval rep...

Page 1015: ...Mpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1015 La perception des taxes change avec le abo After transferring a call to another internal end device the account of the other subscriber is debited ...

Page 1016: ...ection The AOCD service attribute released by the network provider charge transmission during the connection Configured LCR Using the Configuration Manager page Routage Soft LCR 4 0 Débit bancaire en cas d appels professionnels Débit bancaire en cas d appels privés Charge account for group calls The configured call allowance accounts are debited in the case of business calls private calls and or g...

Page 1017: ...onfiguration Manager page Routage Soft LCR 4 0 Important You cannot enter set recharge a call allowance balance if Compte illimité under Recharge selon le modèle suivant is selected Call allowance balance EUR Specifies the current call allowance balance of the call allowance account Recharge selon le modèle suivant Compte illimité The call allowance account has no effect Manuel The call allowance ...

Page 1018: ...increased simultaneously by the configured allowance charge amount Select the check boxes of the subscribers in question and click Enregistrer Définir le crédit Several call allowance accounts are set simultaneously to the same value Select the check boxes of the subscribers in question enter the call allowance balance under sur and click Enregistrer Définir le montant de la recharge For several c...

Page 1019: ...tel COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1019 Fonction Hôtel Settings of the Hotel Function Management of the Hotel Function Settings of the Hotel FunctionManagement of the Hotel Function ...

Page 1020: ...Settings of the Hotel Function COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1020 Settings of the Hotel Function Printer Settings Print Options Printer SettingsPrint Options ...

Page 1021: ...HP Laserjet are supported PCL6 or PCL5c emulation is downward compatible and includes PCL4 Imprimante réseau IP address and port must be entered Printers with an interface compatible with HP JetDirect and the print format PCL3 and later versions are supported Saut de page Each telephone bill is printed out on an individual page Note When switched off the telephone bills original document copies ar...

Page 1022: ...are V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1022 Note When printing out an interim invoice this setting is ignored and only the original is printed Qualité d impression Brouillon Fast print in draft quality Lettre Invoice in letter quality ...

Page 1023: ...ave it out here Objet Caractère gras Libellé de facture Max 80 characters Données de facture Headlines of the invoice data No d affectation Arrivee and Depart are freely selectable recommended preset texts Libellés des colonnes The column headlines of the itemised bills Date Heure Durée Numéro de téléphone and Montant are freely selectable recommended preset texts Montant final Headlines of the fi...

Page 1024: ... exceeded a note appears on the telephone bill that is entered here e g Calls before the following date are not included in the overview Texte de pied de page Caractère gras Footer X 3 lines max 80 characters per line are available Separator Date Heure For example 01 01 2000 12 00 Préréglages Existing entries are discarded and automatic text suggestions are entered Imprimer la page test To check t...

Page 1025: ... of the Hotel Function COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1025 Management of the Hotel Function Hotel Reception Subscribers Room Subscribers Hotel Reception SubscribersRoom Subscribers ...

Page 1026: ... 06 2019 1026 Hotel Reception Subscribers Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Fonction Hôtel Abonnés de la réception Nouveau Adds new hotel reception phone from the configured ISDN system phone subscribers Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 1027: ...iguration Manager page Fonctions Fonction Hôtel Abonnés de la pièce Prevent Room2Room Calls between hotel room phones are not possible Calls to other internal subscribers e g reception room service etc are still possible Nouveau Adds a new hotel room phone from the configured subscribers Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 1028: ...Calendrier COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1028 Calendrier Management Calendars Management Calendars ...

Page 1029: ...s fériés or alternatively by double clicking a day Note Editing holidays Tapping the holiday and clicking Fill out Nom and Date and select an Option actif Day is enabled as holiday une fois Day is enabled as holiday only for the current year LCR actif Day is enabled as LCR Vider le calendrier All holiday entered into the calendar will be deleted Importer Select and import a holiday file ft previou...

Page 1030: ...rwards to a different PBX of the same design Ajouter la liste des jours fériés The holidays valid for the country federal state are added for an indefinite period Holidays with data that changes yearly are calculated automatically by the PBX Note Holidays inserted in this manner can be edited or deleted individually as needed Each of these changes is carried out automatically for all calendar year...

Page 1031: ...LAN TAPI COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1031 LAN TAPI Settings for LAN TAPI Settings for LAN TAPI ...

Page 1032: ...Settings for LAN TAPI COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1032 Settings for LAN TAPI Settings Subscribers SettingsSubscribers ...

Page 1033: ...u du serveur TAPI Freely selectable password that consists of 8 to 32 characters containing digits letters upper and lower case but no German umlauts and ß and special characters _ The password is used for communications with the TAPI server Note To change current passwords click on Éditer les mots de passe Note A coloured bar under the entry field shows the security level of the password red low ...

Page 1034: ...IN password click on Attribuer les mots de passe Redémarrer le serveur TAPI Redémarrage Restarts the TAPI server Utiliser PBX Call Assist Requirements PBX Call Assist function enabled optional see Activation PBX Call Assist is a CTI software available from Auerswald Its use must be switched on in the PBX All available TAPI lines are administrated by the corresponding server software UCServer Other...

Page 1035: ...API Nouveau Selects a LAN TAPI subscriber from the configured phones and adds it to the list All subscribers that should be controlled over a PC must be configured for LAN TAPI Note If PBX Call Assist is switched on all available TAPI lines will instead be administrated by the corresponding UCServer server software Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 1036: ...Parçage d appels COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1036 Parçage d appels Settings Call Parking Settings Call Parking ...

Page 1037: ...ect the parking zone for call parking Note Double allocation of a number is not possible Note Using phone numbers with few digits two or three digit numbers inevitably restricts the possible supply of phone numbers requiring more digits For example if the phone number 12 is assigned the phone numbers 120 129 and 1200 1299 are no longer available Note The default exchange line access number on the ...

Page 1038: ...ne at most After the hold time has elapsed the subscriber that put the call in the parking zone is again signaled that the call is still there If this subscriber is busy the call is put back on hold in the parking zone If the hold time elapses a second time without the call being transferred the connection is disconnected and the caller hears the busy signal ...

Page 1039: ...ement Provider Online Name Search Management Online Name Search Group Filters Settings Online Name Search Group Filters Settings Online Name Search Text Converter Management Provider Online Name SearchManagement Online Name Search Group FiltersSettings Online Name Search Group FiltersSettings Online Name Search Text Converter ...

Page 1040: ...viders Recherche de nom en ligne Requirements A configured DNS server and if necessary an HTTP proxy server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration IP At least one online service provider must have been entered for the online name search The PBX attempts to obtain the missing name from the selected service provider actif Select the service provider to be used for the onli...

Page 1041: ...rovided for the download is for information purposes only and is not mandatory Nouveau Adds a new provider to the list of providers You must then make the settings for the VoIP provider Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list Importer Select and import a provider file n2n that is stored on a PC data storage device or download a configuration from the Internet Note The data of the import f...

Page 1042: ...rs is added to the existing list of providers without verification whether a provider is already contained in the list double entries Note If resetting the data would cause the number of providers to exceed the maximum number of five entries the data is not imported and an error message is displayed Tester Requirements A configured DNS server a configured gateway and if necessary an HTTP proxy ser...

Page 1043: ...agement Provider Online Name Search COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1043 list field select how many of the configured search properties are to be processed and click Exécuter ...

Page 1044: ...pressions Note The filter list accommodates up to five group filters Filtres de groupe Freely selectable name for the group filter Select Nouveau to enter Note If several group filters have been created the sequence of application of these filters can be determined priority A group filter will only be processed if the application of group filters with a higher priority has not been successful Conf...

Page 1045: ...act 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1045 Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list Copier Selects an existing group filter from the list of filters and uses that group filter as the basis for creating a new group filter ...

Page 1046: ...y and the search result will be output Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Recherche de nom en ligne Paramètres de base Configurer Configurer Important To create group filters you need know how in HTML HTTP and regular expressions Note The filter list accommodates up to five group filters Propriété de recherche Search command regular expression or the character string...

Page 1047: ...ed Only the rest will be further processed Replace Match The response of the server HTML code will be filtered according to the search property and the search result will be replaced by the substitute text The modified response will then be further processed completely Mode de ligne The search is made line by line Nouveau Adds a new search property to the list You must then make the settings for t...

Page 1048: ...uted are entered into the text converter During conversion the character string will be substituted by the corresponding text Note Up to 64 character strings can be entered into the text converter Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Recherche de nom en ligne Convertisseur de texte Chaîne de caractères reçue Characters character strings or texts to be substituted Selec...

Page 1049: ...tings Online Name Search Text Converter COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1049 Deletes the entries marked in the list Par défaut Resets the character strings to default values ...

Page 1050: ...File d attente COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1050 File d attente Settings Waiting Field Settings Waiting Field ...

Page 1051: ...field reception phones are busy In this case busy means that there is an ongoing call in the active waiting field receptions or an outgoing or incoming call is ringing If a caller is waiting in the waiting field this does not count as busy après 0 à 120 sec Incoming calls are indicated for a duration of x seconds in the waiting field reception and then automatically put into the waiting field if n...

Page 1052: ...4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1052 Music on Hold and Announcements Management of the Music On Hold and Announcements Settings for Music On Hold and Announcements Management of the Music On Hold and AnnouncementsSettings for Music On Hold and Announcements ...

Page 1053: ...ment of the Music On Hold and Announcements COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1053 Management of the Music On Hold and Announcements Own Files Systemdateien Own FilesSystemdateien ...

Page 1054: ...des fichiers capacité mémoire The combined total size of all audio files wav stored in the PBX must be less than 20 MB The amount of memory already used and the remaining capacity are displayed in MB and as a percentage Écouter A suitable programme is used to open the audio file The file is then either played or saved to a PC data storage device Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 1055: ...d and Announcements Gestion des fichiers capacité mémoire The combined total size of all audio files wav stored in the PBX must be less than 20 MB The amount of memory already used and the remaining capacity are displayed in MB and as a percentage Écouter A suitable programme is used to open the audio file The file is then either played or saved to a PC data storage device ...

Page 1056: ...for Music on Hold Music on Hold with Announcement Music on Hold during the Ringing Period Music on Hold Alarm Announcement before Answering Wake up Announcements Automatic Receptions Source for Music on HoldMusic on Hold with AnnouncementMusic on Hold during the Ringing PeriodMusic on Hold AlarmAnnouncement before AnsweringWake up AnnouncementsAutomatic Receptions ...

Page 1057: ...7 Source for Music on Hold Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Affectation des fichiers Source de la musique d attente Aucune No music on hold is played Interne système de télécommunication The music on hold is played from the PBX ...

Page 1058: ...hiers Volume de la musique d attente pendant l annonce Specifies how loudly the music on hold should be played during the announcement Intégrer l annonce dans la musique d attente An announcement is played together with music on hold Note When switched off music on hold is played without an additional announcement Announcement delay time 0 60 sec Specifies how many seconds delay there will be betw...

Page 1059: ... des fichiers Transfert individuel A caller connected by a blind transfer will exclusively hear music on hold during this process pressing the R key dialling of internal number and ringing period Note When switched off the caller hears the ringtone during the ringing phase Annonce d accueil A caller hears the music on hold after the playback of the announcement before answering Note When switched ...

Page 1060: ...as alarm announcements Specify which alarm announcement is to be used for an alarm on the Périphériques Alarmes Configurer page Annonce par défaut For the standard announcement the PBX uses the audio file specified as the standard file in Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Gestion des fichiers Fichiers système Volume du téléphone en Specifies how loudly the audio file is to be played on the...

Page 1061: ...d for the Ann before Answering function in the Groupes Propriétés Disponibilité and Réseaux publics Acheminement des appels pages Annonce par défaut For the standard announcement the PBX uses the audio file specified as the standard file in Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Gestion des fichiers Fichiers système Volume du téléphone en Specifies how loudly the audio file is to be played on t...

Page 1062: ...e to be used for the wake up function on the Calendriers Plages horaires page Annonce par défaut For the standard announcement the PBX uses the audio file specified as the standard file in Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Gestion des fichiers Fichiers système Volume du téléphone en Specifies how loudly the audio file is to be played on the phone Note The volume at the phone for emergency ...

Page 1063: ...r page Fonctions Music on Hold and Announcements Affectation des fichiers Volume du téléphone en Specifies how loudly the audio file is to be played on the phone Note The volume at the phone for emergency calls cannot be set under 50 Écouter A suitable programme is used to open the audio file The file is then either played or saved to a PC data storage device ...

Page 1064: ...Heures de réveil COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1064 Heures de réveil Settings for Wake Up Functions Settings for Wake Up Functions ...

Page 1065: ...ttings for Wake Up Functions COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1065 Settings for Wake Up Functions Settings Wake up Times for Subscribers SettingsWake up Times for Subscribers ...

Page 1066: ...Settings COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1066 Settings Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Page Fonctions Heures de réveil ...

Page 1067: ... COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1067 Wake up Times for Subscribers Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager Page Fonctions Heures de réveil Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 1068: ...sateurs COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1068 Données des utilisateurs Données d appel Carnets d adresses Numéros spéciaux Messages Données d appelCarnets d adressesNuméros spéciauxMessages ...

Page 1069: ...R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1069 Données d appel Management Call Data Call Data Column Settings Settings Filter Settings Call Data Management Call DataCall Data Column SettingsSettings FilterSettings Call Data ...

Page 1070: ...dialled number of the LCR provider if an external number was dialled via a provider manual entry or automatic LCR Numéro externe Displays the external phone number of the call partner Appels sortants Displays the dialled phone number Appels entrants Displays the phone number transmitted by the caller CLIP information not for unknown phone numbers Appel réveil Displays the phone number of the perso...

Page 1071: ...h configured and enabled Soft Call Phone number is dialled directly Requirements User logged in to the Configuration Manager with Phone book authorisation business Nom externe Displays the name of the external call partner if stored under Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Users Carnets d adresses or transmitted via CLIP For VoIP calls the Nom d affichage Réseaux publics VoIP Fournisseur ...

Page 1072: ...subscriber or group number dialled by the caller Alarm calls Phone number of this alarm Call Through call External number of the Call Through user Door to external calls Phone number of the door terminal Appels de réveil Internal number of the person to be woken up Nom de facture abo Displays the subscriber or group name for Internal subscriber numbers Internal group numbers Appels d alarme Call T...

Page 1073: ... calls Internal subscriber number who forwarded the call to an external connection direct calls to external subscribers are not displayed Nom réel abo Displays the subscriber or group name for Internal subscriber numbers Internal group numbers Appels d alarme Call Through users or external numbers Door to external calls No de raccordement Displays the own phone number Outgoing call Phone number us...

Page 1074: ... Crédits de communication Note If the charges for the calls are to be recorded transmission of the call charges must be enabled on the external S0 ports Note If using an analogue exchange line or a VoIP account for external calls no charges will be displayed unless charges have been entered via Soft LCR tables and the subscriber uses uses the LCR function Direction Outgoing or incoming call Type d...

Page 1075: ...ness calls are then initiated with project numbers that are recorded and displayed if the call was successfully transferred Hotel invoice number Hotld The check in via the hotel reception phone automatically generates a 5 digit billing number which is displayed for calls via the hotel function Tri par défaut The call data is sorted by date and time Actualiser The call data list is refreshed Suppri...

Page 1076: ... numbers of the internal and external participants The duration of a call Note Before the call data are being saved all subscribers to the PBX must be informed that these contents will be forwarded They must also be informed about who will use the data received Note It is absolutely necessary to store the data safely and in accordance with the legal requirements Note If you want to make the call d...

Page 1077: ...he time at the beginning of the call Durée Display of the call duration No LCR Display of the dialled number of the LCR provider if an external number was dialled via a provider manual entry or automatic LCR Numéro externe Displays the external phone number of the call partner Appels sortants Displays the dialled phone number Appels entrants Displays the phone number transmitted by the caller CLIP...

Page 1078: ...ord can be extended by the name and it can be checked or updated Requirements Online name search configured and enabled Soft Call Phone number is dialled directly Requirements User logged in to the Configuration Manager with Phone book authorisation business Nom externe Displays the name of the external call partner if stored under Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Users Carnets d adress...

Page 1079: ...ice Appels entrants Internal subscriber or group number dialled by the caller Alarm calls Phone number of this alarm Call Through call External number of the Call Through user Door to external calls Phone number of the door terminal Appels de réveil Internal number of the person to be woken up Nom de facture abo Displays the subscriber or group name for Internal subscriber numbers Internal group n...

Page 1080: ...nal calls Internal subscriber number who forwarded the call to an external connection direct calls to external subscribers are not displayed Nom réel abo Displays the subscriber or group name for Internal subscriber numbers Internal group numbers Appels d alarme Call Through users or external numbers Door to external calls No de raccordement Displays the own phone number Outgoing call Phone number...

Page 1081: ...on of the call charges must be enabled on the external S0 ports Note If using an analogue exchange line or a VoIP account for external calls no charges will be displayed unless charges have been entered via Soft LCR tables and the subscriber uses uses the LCR function Facteur de décompte Dispalay of the cobversion factor for the costs The value can be changed depending on the subscriber The change...

Page 1082: ...r the default text for this call type is displayed Project Proj Call charges or times can be billed according to individual projects Business calls are then initiated with project numbers that are recorded and displayed if the call was successfully transferred Hotel invoice number Hotld The check in via the hotel reception phone automatically generates a 5 digit billing number which is displayed f...

Page 1083: ...ata Column Settings COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1083 Displays the description of the colum in the call data list Par défaut All settings will be reset to the standard values ...

Page 1084: ...Settings Filter COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1084 Settings Filter Filter Criteria Configure Filter CriteriaConfigure ...

Page 1085: ...nformation V13 06 2019 1085 Filter Criteria Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Données d appel Filtres Nom du filtre Name of the used filter standard or own filter Time period Filter criteria for the time period ...

Page 1086: ... the following parameters Délai only for the selection Personnalisé Fixed period Heure Fixed daytime Durée de l appel Displays calls of a certain length Coûts Displays calls of a certain call charge Direction Appels entrants Appels sortants Calls that are displayed after being filtered Type de facture Private Calls Business Calls Successful Calls Unsuccessful Calls Calls that are displayed after b...

Page 1087: ...splayed after being filtered Filtre ciblé Possible entries for the following settings Phone number name and replacement Subscriber Scr no invoice scr no real Calls made by selected internal subscribers Numéro de ligne Calls initiated via the own external number Numéro externe Calls made with selected external subscribers Numéro s de projet Calls assigned to certain projects Retour Back to previous...

Page 1088: ...Settings Call Data COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1088 Settings Call Data Call Data Management SFTP Transfer Call Data ManagementSFTP Transfer ...

Page 1089: ... PMP and Réseaux publics RNIS Numéro Principal d abonnement Faisceau NDI Configurer The following calls can be recorded Chargeable calls Chargeable calls and unsuccessful outgoing calls e g transfer charges Gratuits Appels sans informations de coûts Calls that are free of charge or for which no charge information is transmitted Réussis uniquement Calls that are free of charge or for which no charg...

Page 1090: ... recorded Appels entrants réussis Payants uniquement Calls that cause charges e g collect calls échecs Unsuccessful calls Coûts non liés aux appels Calls with additional charges e g the transfer charge for collect calls Enregistrer les appels de réveil dans la base de données d appel Wake up calls to internal subscribers see Fonctions Heures de réveil ...

Page 1091: ...rmines in which form the call data is provided Séparateur de données Émettre en tête Fichier de données d appel Determines when and how often a call data file is provided Création de fichier Intervalle de nettoyage Suppression automatique si 1 à 200 Mo est utilisé Dossier de fichiers de données d appel calldata Fonction Hôtel Settings for providing subscriber related call data in hotel operation C...

Page 1092: ...SFTP Transfer COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1092 Dossier de fichiers de données d appel checkoutdata ...

Page 1093: ...ettings Standard Contact Groups Settings of the Address Books Settings Address Book Transmission for DECT Handsets Information about Transfer via LDAP Server Management Contacts and assignmentSettings of the ContactsSettings of the Contact GroupsSettings of the Contact Group AuthorisationsSettings Standard Contact GroupsSettings of the Address BooksSettings Address Book Transmission for DECT Hands...

Page 1094: ...000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1094 Management Contacts and assignment Contacts Contact Groups and Assignment Google Contact Groups CSV Import Group ContactsContact Groups and AssignmentGoogle Contact GroupsCSV Import Group ...

Page 1095: ...ubscribers read access to at least one contact group Tous les contacts All contacts are displayed Note Searching for contacts can be restricted in the following way via contact groups by clicking a contact group using the filter by entering at least one character or digit in one or more of the entry fields using the tabs by clicking Tous Contacts sans groupes de contacts or an initial letter Butto...

Page 1096: ...tact group To delete a contact from a Groupe de contacts Google you first need to delete the contact in Gmail The contact will then be deleted from the Google contact group linked to Gmail after the next synchronisation Important Deleting a contact cannot be undone Proceed as follows for subscribers Write access to at least one contact group Only contacts that are assigned to the contact groups fo...

Page 1097: ...ew Importer la vCard v2 1 Import of a vCard in version 2 1 Importer le CSV If you have exported an address book in csv format e g from a COMmander 6000 that is using an older firmware version or from a different PBX you can import the contact data in that file to Tous les contacts view and then assign the contacts to one or several contact groups If the csv import originates from an old phone book...

Page 1098: ...assigned to the predefined standard contact groups Fichier CSV A csv file csv is loaded into the PBX via the Configuration Manager Importer Select an import template Aperçu Display the entries in the CSV file Exporter le CSV Requirements For subscriber read access to at least one contact group You can export contact groups contacts with the same initial letter or Tous les contacts in a single text...

Page 1099: ...ses Position and department within a company Note All subscribers must be informed prior to the storage of the contacts that a transfer of this content takes place and by whom the data obtained are processed Note A secure storage of the data within the framework of the legal regulations is necessary Note If you want to make the contacts available to your specialised dealer or to the manufacturer f...

Page 1100: ...be selected per contact group It is not possible to change the contact group type afterwards Note If you have not selected a type the Groupe de contacts par défaut type is automatically assigned to the new contact group Supprimer les contacts du groupe de contacts The selected contact will be removed from all contact groups The selected contact will be removed permanently Important Deleting a cont...

Page 1101: ...portant Note the following legal notes The contacts may contain the following legally protected components Private and work addresses Private and work phone and fax numbers Birthdays Photos of the person in connection with the data backup Electronic contact addresses private and work e g the e mail addresses Position and department within a company Note All subscribers must be informed prior to th...

Page 1102: ... 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1102 Note If you want to make the contacts available to your specialised dealer or to the manufacturer for error analysis you must make sure that the legal requirements are fulfilled ...

Page 1103: ... only be copied into another contact group Changes must be made directly in the Gmail account They are adopted with the next synchronization If you delete a Gmail contact from a standard or DECT contact group it still remains in the Google group Supprimer les contacts du groupe de contacts The selected contact will be removed from all contact groups The selected contact will be removed permanently...

Page 1104: ...contain the following legally protected components Private and work addresses Private and work phone and fax numbers Birthdays Photos of the person in connection with the data backup Electronic contact addresses private and work e g the e mail addresses Position and department within a company Note All subscribers must be informed prior to the storage of the contacts that a transfer of this conten...

Page 1105: ...0 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1105 Note If you want to make the contacts available to your specialised dealer or to the manufacturer for error analysis you must make sure that the legal requirements are fulfilled ...

Page 1106: ...t group except from Google contact groups Supprimer les contacts du groupe d importation CSV The selected contact is deleted from the CSV import group Important Deleting a contact cannot be undone Requirements for subscribers Write access to at least one contact group Only contacts that are assigned to the contact groups for which the subscriber has write access Note You can select and delete mult...

Page 1107: ...s du groupe d importation CSV Select all or a selected CSV contact you want to adopt from the CSV import group into the pbx Important Deleting a contact cannot be undone Groupes de contacts Select all or a selected contact group Déplacer The CSV contacts are moved into all or a selected contact group Requirements for subscribers Write access to at least one contact group Only contacts that are ass...

Page 1108: ...not entered anything in the entry field Nom d affichage the display name will automatically be generated from the entries in the entry fields Prénom and Nom If there are no entries at all in the entry fields Prénom and Nom the display name will then be generated from the entry in the entry field Entreprise Note the following differences when using the contact data in the connected phones COMfortel...

Page 1109: ... display name will be displayed perhaps more depending on space and character width Additionally to the display name four phone numbers per contact will be displayed COMfortel 1100 1500 2500 AB VoIP 2500 AB und DECT 900 In the contact list of the phone only the first 16 characters of the display name will be displayed Additionally to the display name only one phone number per contact will be displ...

Page 1110: ... les contacts The contact group Annuaire version 1 is created automatically Only over these contacts can be provided to also older system phones COMfortel 1100 1500 2500 AB VoIP 2500 AB The phone books of these system phones as well as the Annuaire version 1 are limited to 400 contacts Only one phone number can be stored per contact Note Subscribers with phone book authorisation and read access to...

Page 1111: ...COMfortel DECT 900 handsets Google For synchronisation with Gmail Note The contacts in the DECT 900 and DECT 900C contact groups must also be contained in the Annuaire version 1 Note Only one type can be selected per contact group It is not possible to change the contact group type afterwards Note If you have not selected a type the Groupe de contacts par défaut type is automatically assigned to t...

Page 1112: ...ion Entering of the authentication code Configuration Synchronisation Google active The google contact group is synchronised with the contact information of the Gmail account Intervalle de mise à jour Entering the time interval of an automatic synchronisation Groupes de contacts Google Selection of google contact groups that are synchronised automatically Synchronisation manuelle Manual synchronis...

Page 1113: ... running Synchronisation not successful Note A maximum of 2000 contacts can be synchronised Nouveau A new contact group is added Enregistrer The changes are saved Supprimer The selected contact group is deleted Requirements for subscribers Write access to at least one contact group Only contacts that are assigned to the contact groups for which the subscriber has write access ...

Page 1114: ...Settings of the Contact Groups COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1114 Note You can select and delete multiple contact groups at once by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key ...

Page 1115: ...he Contact Group Authorisations COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1115 Settings of the Contact Group Authorisations Authorisations Contact Group Filter AuthorisationsContact Group Filter ...

Page 1116: ... a contact dial from within the contacts Soft Call read the QR code export a contact data record vCard A subscriber with write an read acces may via the Contacts et affectation and Groupes de contacts par défaut pages additionally create contacts import contact images edit contacts import contact data sets vCard adopt contacts from the call data list enter short code numbers delete contacts import...

Page 1117: ...ntact group Filtres de groupes de contacts Select a contact group or all contact groups for editing the authorisations for individual subscribers Filter Enter filter criteria for the search of contacts into the entry fields Numéro de téléphone and Nom Tous The subscriber receives read and write access for all contact groups Accès en lecture The subscriber receives read access for this contact grou...

Page 1118: ...OMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1118 Settings Standard Contact Groups Information Logged in Subscriber Subscriber with Write Authorisation InformationLogged in SubscriberSubscriber with Write Authorisation ...

Page 1119: ...ll data list However contacts that have been created by importing an address book file are not automatically assigned to a standard contact group You can define one or more contact group s as your standard contact group If you are logged on as a user you must define at least one contact group as your standard contact group before you can create a contact This is because users cannot create a conta...

Page 1120: ... administrator page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Groupes de contacts par défaut As a subscriber page Contacts et affectation Requirements For subscribers read access to at least one contact group Nom Name of the logged in subscriber Groupes de contacts par défaut The contact group is defined as standard contact group ...

Page 1121: ...ion Proceed as follows As administrator page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Groupes de contacts par défaut As a subscriber page Contacts et affectation Requirements For subscribers write access to at least one contact group Numéro de téléphone Phone number of the phone Nom Name of the phone Enregistrer The changes are saved ...

Page 1122: ...ct 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1122 Settings of the Address Books LDAP Server Conversion Password for the Access via COMfortel DECT IP1040 LDAP ServerConversionPassword for the Access via COMfortel DECT IP1040 ...

Page 1123: ...er the PBX s contact data to those IP end devices which support this transfer method e g IP DECT servers or SIP phones with LDAP support Any contact data that is input directly on a phone is not transferred to the central address books Auerswald FONtevo provides LDAP support for the following IP end devices IP phone COMfortel 1200 IP IP phones COMfortel 1400 IP 2600 IP 3600 IP firmware version 2 4...

Page 1124: ... Requirements At least one contact group that is configured in the address books Select the contact groups up to 5 which are transferred to the LDAP server and therefore also to the IP end devices The user name resulting from the name of the contact group along with the associated password is needed for authentification of IP end devices on the LDAP server so that they have only read access to the...

Page 1125: ...level does not necessarily indicate a secure password as this can also be reached by entering names and birth dates in connection with special characters However names and birth dates should not be used as passwords To create a secure password you can consult for example the guidelines of the German Federal Office for Information Security BSI in German Caution Visible passwords are a security risk...

Page 1126: ...display name is generated automatically from the entries in the Prénom and Nom entry fields in accordance with the predefined conversion process when you save the entry Nom Prénom Display names are formed from the surname and the first name separated by a comma and a blank space Prénom Nom Display names are formed from the first name a blank space and the surname Note If no data is present either ...

Page 1127: ...red in the Configuration Manager of the COMfortel DECT IP1040 page Network PBX Additional Servers under Phonebook Mot de passe Freely selectable password that consists of 8 characters containing digits letters upper and lower case but no German umlauts and ß Note To change current passwords click on Éditer les mots de passe Note A coloured bar under the entry field shows the security level of the ...

Page 1128: ...ced Information V13 06 2019 1128 To create a secure password you can consult for example the guidelines of the German Federal Office for Information Security BSI in German Caution Visible passwords are a security risk After entering the PIN password click on Attribuer les mots de passe ...

Page 1129: ...books of the handsets Configured password for the access via COMfortel DECT IP1040 Using the Configuration Manager page Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Paramètres Note The access with other passwords e g the admin password is not recommended as the password is sent unencrypted by the COMfortel DECT IP1040 The access must be configured in the Configuration Manager of the COMfortel DECT ...

Page 1130: ...ot been defined manually Entries that were defined using the Configuration Manager will be overwritten by the Configuration Manager If more phone numbers have been selected than available in the memory locations of the handset phone numbers are transmitted to the handset until all the memory locations are filled The phone numbers with lower short code dial numbers are transferred first Note As soo...

Page 1131: ...are V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1131 Note The handset is not reachable during a data transfer duration 2 minutes max and there is Copying from PBX in the display Note At an IKON DECT 1020 UTF 8 charachters cannot be used in the name field of the phone book entries ...

Page 1132: ...c auerswald BaseDN dc auerswald Password auerswaldsecret For the transfer of single contact groups e g for contact group DECT1 User name cn DECT1 dc auerswald BaseDN ou DECT1 dc auerswald Password is configurable For the transfer of contacts of a single subscriber e g for the internal number 31 User name phoneNumber 31 dc Subscriber number BaseDN dc auerswald In this case the password is the user ...

Page 1133: ...s below the entry and list fields you can mark and copy the user name and BaseDN Note In the Configuration Manager of the IP DECT server COMfortel WS 400 IP or COMfortel WS 650 IP you have to enter the user name and the BaseDN on page Administration Phonebook in the following fields the user name e g cn auerswaldschandelah dc auerswald in the Bind user entry field and the BaseDN e g dc auerswald i...

Page 1134: ...Numéros spéciaux COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1134 Numéros spéciaux Management Configuration ManagementConfiguration ...

Page 1135: ... This column displays the direction incoming outgoing of the call deblocker call restrictor Rejet des appels anonymes Anonymous incoming calls are rejected by the call restrictor Rejeter les appels avec des caractères spéciaux The following characters are valid for phone numbers 0 9 space Phone numbers containing other characters will be rejected Ext number range Name Display of the phone number r...

Page 1136: ...r page Données des utilisateurs Numéros spéciaux Configurer Rufnummer Bereich Eintrag der Rufnummer und des Bereichs für das betreffende Freiwerk Sperrwerk Name Eintrag des Namens zur entsprechenden Rufnummer Neu Ein neues Freiwerk Sperrwerk wird hinzugefügt Speichern Die Änderungen werden gespeichert Löschen Der markierte Eintrag wird gelöscht ...

Page 1137: ...Messages COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1137 Messages Management Management ...

Page 1138: ... as follows Using the Configuration Manager For admin Données des utilisateurs Carnets d adresses Messages For user Messages Voice mail fax boxes Messages Selcet the voice mailbox in question according to its name or number Filtres Tous Shows all messages faxes including those in the archive Nouveau Shows only new messages faxes aujourd hui to mois dernier Shows all messages faxes received in the ...

Page 1139: ...re displayed which contain the searched phone number in the Appelant Numéro composé or Ligne principale columns Phone number ranges Only messages faxes are displayed which contain the searched phone number range in the Appelant Numéro composé or Ligne principale columns e g 00 for international calls Nom Only messages faxes are displayed which contain the searched name in the Appelant or Ligne pri...

Page 1140: ...page and update the data displayed Note If the fax could not be transferred is displayed under Options Moreover a status message will be output Opens or saves the message fax Sends the message fax via e mail If the configurations for e mail transfer have not yet been completed e g missing message recipient will be displayed and the message fax will not be sent via e mail Supprimer Deletes the entr...

Page 1141: ...on à distance SIPS SRTP interne VoIP Liste des adresses IP bloquées et autorisées Certificats Courrier électronique Messages système Logs Données de service Données constructeur et opérateurActivationDroits d accèsSauvegarde de donnéesMise à jour et redémarrage du firmwareDate et heure du système de télécommunicationConfiguration IPConfiguration VoIPConfiguration à distanceSIPS SRTP interne VoIP L...

Page 1142: ...ucteur et opérateur COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1142 Données constructeur et opérateur Management of the PBX Dealer and Operator Data Management of the PBX Dealer and Operator Data ...

Page 1143: ... Dealer and Operator Data COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1143 Management of the PBX Dealer and Operator Data PBX Data Administrator Access Dealer Data PBX DataAdministrator AccessDealer Data ...

Page 1144: ...lows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Dealer and operator data Nom du système For identification of the PBX It is displayed in the status line and the PBX data overview click on the logo Désignation du système This is used to enter any additional PBX information that may be required ...

Page 1145: ...administrator registration on the PBX Note Changes at the administrator access are only possible with an encrypted HTTPS connection Note After a change a new regisration is required Nom d utilisateur admin Consists of up to 32 characters containing digits letters upper and lower case but no umlauts and ß Modifier le PIN admin Enables the input option 6 characters digits for PIN admin and PIN admin...

Page 1146: ... bar under the entry field shows the security level of the password red low level green high level Note Passwords with a low security level cannot be saved Caution A high level does not necessarily indicate a secure password as this can also be reached by entering names and birth dates in connection with special characters However names and birth dates should not be used as passwords To create a s...

Page 1147: ...ler and operator data Entreprise Site web Data of the specialised dealer or qualified electrician who commissioned the PBX and is servicing it They appear in the overview when you click the logo Entreprise Site web Data of the specialised dealer or qualified electrician who commissioned the PBX and is servicing it They appear in the overview when you click the logo ...

Page 1148: ...Activation COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1148 Activation Management Activation Management Activation ...

Page 1149: ...activation in the online shop or have your dealer do it for you Requirements A user account in the Online Shop Nombre de fonctions activées Overview of the enabled functions Code d activation pour les fonctions avancées Acheter code d activation de bon d achat Shop online Opens the online shop Saisir code d activation de bon d achat Important Note that when you change a voucher code into an activa...

Page 1150: ...Management Activation COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1150 Actualiser The overview of the enabled functions is refreshed ...

Page 1151: ...Droits d accès COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1151 Droits d accès Configuring Access Authorisation Configuring Access Authorisation ...

Page 1152: ... V13 06 2019 1152 Configuring Access Authorisation Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Droits d accès 1 Click next to the required page to list all subpages 2 Select or clear all check boxes for the pages to which sub admin and user shall have access ...

Page 1153: ...Sauvegarde de données COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1153 Sauvegarde de données Management of the Configuration Data Management of the Configuration Data ...

Page 1154: ... Configuration Data Store Configuration Data in the PBX Read Configuration Data from the PBX Regenerate Configuration Restore old Configuration Data Insert Restoration Point Store Configuration Data in the PBXRead Configuration Data from the PBXRegenerate ConfigurationRestore old Configuration DataInsert Restoration Point ...

Page 1155: ...tion data Note A configuration file that was created with an older firmware version may possibly not contain all of the configuration data for example data for new functions that were added by a firmware update Select and import a configuration file cfg that is stored on a PC data storage device Reprendre les données de configuration cannot be edited Reprendre les paramètres réseau Reprendre les d...

Page 1156: ... others the following legally especially protected components Configuration of the PBX Names of internal subscribers Passwords of PBX subscribers VoIP accounts and VoIP subscribers Address books of the PBX Connection data sets with destination source and time information of a telecommunication connection Note Before the data backup is being saved all subscribers to the PBX must be informed that th...

Page 1157: ...uration file cfg Lire les données de configuration cannot be edited Lire les paramètres réseau Lire les données du système Lire la musique d attente et les annonces Photos de contact Activates the selected data packets for exportation from the PBX Réinitialiser la configuration When resetting the configuration the following parameters are maintained in contrast to a reset to the ex factory state v...

Page 1158: ...Read Configuration Data from the PBX COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1158 Saved hold music and announcements Call data System messages ...

Page 1159: ...er page Administration Sauvegarde de données For automatic upload Using the PBX Régénérer When regenerating the configuration the configuration data is read out of the PBX The database is reset and the configuration data is restored to the PBX once more This eliminates internal errors the configuration data may contain The configuration of the PBX remains unchangend ...

Page 1160: ...guration Requirements Set restoration point Select the configuration file to be restored Restaurer les paramètres réseau Enables the restoration of the network settings Restaurer Important Restoring an old configuration overwrites the current configuration data Note A configuration file that was created with an older firmware version may possibly not contain all of the configuration data for examp...

Page 1161: ...estore old Configuration Data COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1161 Selected configuration file The configuration data is restored at the restoration point The PBX restarts ...

Page 1162: ...on data is set the current configuration data is saved in a configuration file in the PBX The configuration files are archived with information about the time and date they were created They are available in the Fichier de configuration list field under Restaurer les anciennes données de configuration A maximum of ten restoration points are set If an eleventh restoration point is set the oldest of...

Page 1163: ...jour et redémarrage du firmware COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1163 Mise à jour et redémarrage du firmware Management of the Firmware Updates Management of the Firmware Updates ...

Page 1164: ... PBX Maual Firmware Update Firmware Update via Update Server Firmware Update for VoIP System Phones Restore Firmware Reboot Reset of the PBX Restart Power Down of the PBX Store the Firmware in the PBX Maual Firmware Update Firmware Update via Update ServerFirmware Update for VoIP System PhonesRestore Firmware Reboot Reset of the PBX Restart Power Down of the PBX ...

Page 1165: ...d Information V13 06 2019 1165 Store the Firmware in the PBX Maual Firmware Update Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Firmwareupdate restart To restore firmware to restart and only COMmander 6000 R RX to power down the PBX By clicking a button on the PBX ...

Page 1166: ...f four blocks with three digits for IPv4 addresses or eight blocks with four digits or characters for IPv6 addresses Note The factory settings are already configured with the address of the update server www auerswald update de Update Requirements PBX connected to broadband Internet access Configured address of the update server Configured DNS server and if necessary an HTTP proxy server page Admi...

Page 1167: ...rmware update of the PBX and or all connected ISDN COMfortel system phones Intervalle Délai h Requirements PBX connected to broadband Internet access Configured address of the update server Configured DNS server and if necessary an HTTP proxy server page Administration Configuration IP COMfortel 2500 COMfortel 1500 COMfortel 1100 Entered phone number of the update server 49 5306 9200510 into the p...

Page 1168: ...nly the update status is displayed during the update for system phone updates Note When you open the page it first shows the status which is automatically updated every 30 seconds Rechercher des mises à jour du firmware en ligne If searching for available firmware updates is switched on the PBX searches the update server for available firmware updates Their availability is signalled by a system me...

Page 1169: ...mwareupdate restart To restore firmware to restart and only COMmander 6000 R RX to power down the PBX By clicking a button on the PBX If COMfortel 1400 IP 2600 IP and oder COMfortel 3600 IP system phones have been configured at the phones itself as firmware distributing phones you will find the following information here IPv4 address of the distributing phone Version number of the current firmware...

Page 1170: ...te carried out The PBX retains not only the current firmware but also the firmware previously used in the flash memory If necessary the old firmware can be restored Caution The PBX reboots automatically after you restore the previous firmware This interrupts all the connections with the web server all the calls and the data services Unsaved data gets lost Note The previous firmware will only be re...

Page 1171: ...til the end of the waiting time If all calls all connections to from the web server and all data services are terminated the PBX will perform a restart even before the defined time has elapsed If a call a connection is active after the time has elapsed this call will be interrupted to perform the restart The Power LED lights up flashes in red and orange for up to two minutes If the Power LED light...

Page 1172: ...ion Firmwareupdate restart To restore firmware to restart and only COMmander 6000 R RX to power down the PBX By clicking a button on the PBX Arrêter Requirements Configured timeframe until power down under Redémarrer le système de télécommunication reboot As soon as the Power LED is red you can pull the power plug of the PBX and accessory equipment if required out of the socket ...

Page 1173: ... système de télécommunication COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1173 Date et heure du système de télécommunication Settings of Date and time of the PBX Settings of Date and time of the PBX ...

Page 1174: ...1174 Settings of Date and time of the PBX One Time Configuration of Date and time Automatic Synchronisation of the PBX Time Date Automatic Distribution of the PBX Time Date One Time Configuration of Date and timeAutomatic Synchronisation of the PBX Time DateAutomatic Distribution of the PBX Time Date ...

Page 1175: ...ng a character string on the internal phone see Time and Date of the PBX Manuel The time can be entered manually Heure Enter in format hh mm ss Date Enter in format JJJJ MM TT Fuseau horaire UTC The UTC Coordinated Universal Time world time is a combination of the International Atomic Time TAI and Universal Time UT It is used instead to Greenwich Mean Time GMT Location name E g Berlin Régler maint...

Page 1176: ... 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1176 The UTC Coordinated Universal Time world time is a combination of the International Atomic Time TAI and Universal Time UT It is used instead to Greenwich Mean Time GMT City name E g Berlin ...

Page 1177: ...NIS Note The network provider usually transmits a time precisely to the minute Note The time is updated at most once per hour Requirements External S0 port optional see Technical Data in the Instructions Disabled automatic updating of the PBX time via the network Après chaque appel RNIS The time transmitted by the network provider during an outgoing external call is used for setting the PBX time o...

Page 1178: ...of the PBX time via the network is performed at the selected time interval e g every 5 hours Serveur de temps public Serveur NTP The PBX time will be accepted from an NTP server at the selected time interval Select the country in the upper list field and select the NTP server in the lower entry field or Serveur manuel Port Enter the address of the local NTP server or name of an external NTP server...

Page 1179: ... PBX Time Date Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Date et heure du système de télécommunication Using a character string on the internal phone see Time and Date of the PBX Service de serveur NTP Requirements PBX connection to the network The PBX can be used as an NTP server by other devices in the network ...

Page 1180: ...Configuration IP COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1180 Configuration IP Settings of the IP Configuration Settings of the IP Configuration ...

Page 1181: ...ormation V13 06 2019 1181 Settings of the IP Configuration Server Configuration Ethernet Configuration COMpact 4DSP DNS Configuration HTTP Proxy Configuration SFTP Server Server ConfigurationEthernet ConfigurationCOMpact 4DSPDNS ConfigurationHTTP Proxy ConfigurationSFTP Server ...

Page 1182: ...rom the Internet via a router and a fixed IP address You can view the ports already configured on the Aperçu Ports page Caution A port change will be made out of security reasons especially if the PBX has to be reachable from the Internet via router and fixed IP address Port HTTPS du serveur Web Port 443 is used for accessing the web server by default The address can thus be entered as follows htt...

Page 1183: ...ed to HTTPS Note When switched off the connection is carried out via HTTP Accès au serveur web uniquement dans le réseau local For the increased security the webserver access is limited to the local network Accès API uniquement dans le réseau local For the increased security the API access is limited to the local network Sécurité accrue Content Security Policy The CSP header is activated Cross Sit...

Page 1184: ...une action n a lieu après Minutes 5 60 The time lapse with the range 5 to 60 for a forced logout defines after how many minutes a user is automatically logged out of the Configuration Manager if no action has been taken in the Configuration Manager within a configured time period If an action happens after the automatic logout the user will see the page for a new login UPnP If the UPnP service is ...

Page 1185: ...ements Disabled DHCP client Adresse IP IPv4 address in the range 0 255 example 192 168 0 240 Reprendre immédiatement The IPv4 address is immediately applied and the PBX is routed to the new IPv4 address Renewed registration required Reprendre en cas de redémarrage The IPv4 address is not applied until the next time the PBX is restarted Masque de sous réseau IPv4 address of the subnet mask in the r...

Page 1186: ...nfiguration Mode IPv6 If IPv6 is switched on an IP address complying with version 6 of the Internet protocol can be assigned to the PBX Thanks to the greater length of IPv6 addresses eight blocks with four digits each example 3001 00FF ABC0 0EAC 0001 0000 0000 000F IPv6 offers a greater number of available IP addresses than version 4 of the Internet protocol IPv4 disabled Switches the use of IPv6 ...

Page 1187: ...187 IPv6 status IPv6 static selected Adresse IPv6 Enter the IPv6 address of the PBX Longueur de préfixe Enter the prefix length in the range 1 to 128 The prefix specifies to which subnet the IPv6 address belongs Passerelle IPv6 Enter the IPv6 gateway Possible entries Digits characters and ...

Page 1188: ...pact 4DSP module Adresse réseau For communication with the DSP module the CPU uses a predefined 8 address subnet in the IPv4 address space with the network address 192 168 240 24 If the IP addresses contained therein are already being used within your network for other network devices you must configure a different subnet Enter the network address of the subnet with a range of 0 to 255 example 192...

Page 1189: ... dot Adresse IPv6 Eight blocks separated by a colon Note Click Tester la connexion to check functioning of the Internet connection The PBX will then send a Ping command to test whether www google de can be reached www google de has been chosen because it can usually be reached A DNS server is necessary for Internet access The data is specified by the Internet service provider or system administrat...

Page 1190: ...00 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1190 DHCP enabled Despite the enabled DHCP client the DNS server set here is used Note When switched off the PBX receives the DNS server address automatically from a DHCP server ...

Page 1191: ...nloaded The HTTP Proxy is enabled and additional settings must be made Adresse IP ou URL Port Enter the IP address or URL IPv4 address Four blocks separated by a dot Adresse IPv6 Eight blocks separated by a dot URL Characters example www proxyserver de Enter the related port number port in the range 1 to 65535 Note If you do not enter anything in this entry field port 3128 will be entered automati...

Page 1192: ...HTTP Proxy Configuration COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1192 Enter a username for the authorisation to the HTTP proxy Mot de passe Enter the related password ...

Page 1193: ...d Enable the SFTP server if you want to forward this file to external programmes e g evaluation programmes A password is required 8 to 32 digits Digits 0 9 Characters a z A Z no German umlauts and ß Special characters _ Note To change current passwords click on Éditer les mots de passe Note For registering at the SFTP server of the PBX an external programme requires the user name and password The ...

Page 1194: ... saved Caution A high level does not necessarily indicate a secure password as this can also be reached by entering names and birth dates in connection with special characters However names and birth dates should not be used as passwords Caution Visible passwords are a security risk After entering click Attribuer les mots de passe ...

Page 1195: ...Configuration VoIP COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1195 Configuration VoIP Settings for VoIP Settings for VoIP ...

Page 1196: ...13 06 2019 1196 Settings for VoIP Distribution of the VoIP Channels SIP RTP Quality of Service STUN Server for the Connection of External VoIP Subscribers Distribution of the VoIP ChannelsSIPRTPQuality of ServiceSTUN Server for the Connection of External VoIP Subscribers ...

Page 1197: ...Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1197 Distribution of the VoIP Channels Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration VoIP Requirements VoIP channels optional see Technical Data in the Instructions ...

Page 1198: ...Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1198 SIP Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration VoIP Requirements VoIP channels optional see Technical Data in the Instructions ...

Page 1199: ... Manager page Administration Configuration VoIP Requirements VoIP channels optional see Technical Data in the Instructions Unité centrale The RTP port is a port on the local system that is used as the outgoing port for RTP transfers Note The page Synthèses Ports shows an overview of the PBX ports incoming and outgoing ...

Page 1200: ...Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1200 Quality of Service Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration VoIP Requirements VoIP channels optional see Technical Data in the Instructions ...

Page 1201: ...Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1201 STUN Server for the Connection of External VoIP Subscribers Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration VoIP Requirements VoIP channels optional see Technical Data in the Instructions ...

Page 1202: ...Configuration à distance COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1202 Configuration à distance Settings for the Remote Configuration Settings for the Remote Configuration ...

Page 1203: ...e Configuration Remote Programming Authorisation for Remote Configuration Remote Configuration for System Phones Remote Configuration via Remote Access Server in the Internet Remote ProgrammingAuthorisation for Remote ConfigurationRemote Configuration for System PhonesRemote Configuration via Remote Access Server in the Internet ...

Page 1204: ...Remote Programming COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1204 Remote Programming Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration à distance ...

Page 1205: ...mote Configuration COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1205 Authorisation for Remote Configuration Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration à distance ...

Page 1206: ... for System Phones COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1206 Remote Configuration for System Phones Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration à distance ...

Page 1207: ...er in the Internet COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1207 Remote Configuration via Remote Access Server in the Internet Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration à distance ...

Page 1208: ...SIPS SRTP interne VoIP COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1208 SIPS SRTP interne VoIP Settings SIPS SRTP Settings SIPS SRTP ...

Page 1209: ...e V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1209 Settings SIPS SRTP SIPS SRTP Root Certificate PBX Certificate Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Internal SIPS SRTP VoIP SIPS SRTPRoot CertificatePBX Certificate ...

Page 1210: ...SIPS SRTP COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1210 SIPS SRTP Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Internal SIPS SRTP VoIP ...

Page 1211: ...hom and for whom the certificate has been issued more information e g serial number and version Éditeur Publisher of the root certificate Importer Select a certificate that is stored on a data storage device and store it in the PBX Exporter The certificate stored in the PBX is downloaded from the device and saved to a PC data storage device Renouveler The certificate is renewed This affects among ...

Page 1212: ...tes a certificate currently saved in the PBX after user confirmation at the prompt Empreinte digitale Fingerprint of the root certificate The fingerprint clearly identifies the root certificate with a numerical code Note If the root certificate is renewed a new fingerprint is generated automatically ...

Page 1213: ...displayed the period of validity by whom and for whom the certificate has been issued more information e g serial number and version Note A pbx certificate can not be saved when a change is made it must be renewed This affects among other things the period of validity and the fingerprint of the certificate Propriétaire Owner of the pbx certificate Nom général CN Entry of an IP address or domain UR...

Page 1214: ... device Renouveler The certificate is renewed This affects among other things the period of validity and the fingerprint of the certificate Supprimer Deletes a certificate currently saved in the PBX after user confirmation at the prompt Clé privée Clé privée présente A private key is available in the pbx certificate Aucune clé privée présente A private key is not available in the pbx certificate N...

Page 1215: ...rmation V13 06 2019 1215 Importer Select a certificate that is stored on a data storage device and store it in the PBX An existing certificate will be overwritten Supprimer Deletes the private key currently saved in the PBX after user confirmation at the prompt ...

Page 1216: ...s IP bloquées et autorisées COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1216 Liste des adresses IP bloquées et autorisées Settings of the IP Black and Whitelist Settings of the IP Black and Whitelist ...

Page 1217: ...Settings of the IP Black and Whitelist COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1217 Settings of the IP Black and Whitelist IP Black and Whitelist IP Black and Whitelist ...

Page 1218: ...report During the block time the PBX continues to monitor the traffic from this IP address If the traffic from this IP address to the PBX continues to be too high the single block time is extended block time restarts If the number of attacks from IP addresses over the Internet exceeds a threshold all traffic outside of the local network is blocked global block The local network is the network conf...

Page 1219: ...ouveau Adresse IP Enter a new IP address in the entry fields IPv4 address Four blocks separated by a dot Adresse IPv6 Eight blocks separated by a colon Masque de sous réseau Masque de sous réseau Four blocks separated by a dot Indicatif régional Digits 1 to 128 Note The subnet mask is entered automatically for a network computer when you click Calculateur du réseau You can then also set the Suffix...

Page 1220: ...ion V13 06 2019 1220 Configured locks can be transferred into the whitelist Select the black list entry Transférer Supprimer The administrator can view automatically configured restrictions and if necessary cancel them in the IP blacklists The marked entry will be deleted ...

Page 1221: ...Certificats COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1221 Certificats Management of the Certificates Management of the Certificates ...

Page 1222: ...anced Information V13 06 2019 1222 Management of the Certificates Information Not trustworthy Trustworthy Certificate Authorities Webserver SIPS SRTP internal VoIP View InformationNot trustworthyTrustworthyCertificate AuthoritiesWebserverSIPS SRTP internal VoIP View ...

Page 1223: ...rmation When an encrypted connection e g SIPS is being set up it is important to verify the authenticity of the server and consequently the identity of a web page During setup of a connection the certificate provided by the server is checked against a root certificate stored in the PBX ...

Page 1224: ...t certificate or stack of certificates stored in the PBX fails the connection will be interrupted and the certificate will be regarded as not trustworthy Fournisseur The column displays the issuer of the certificate Émis le The column displays when the certificate has been issued Valide jusqu au The column displays the validity period of the certificate Zertifikat vertrauen Das markierte Zertifika...

Page 1225: ...cate or stack of certificates stored in the PBX does not fail the connection will be set up and the certificate will be regarded as trustworthy Fournisseur The column displays the issuer of the certificate Émis le The column displays when the certificate has been issued Valide jusqu au The column displays the validity period of the certificate Importer Select a certificate that is stored on a data...

Page 1226: ...tificate serves to assign a specific public key to a person or organisation The certificate authority certifies this assignment by adding its own digital signature Fournisseur The column displays the issuer of the certificate Émis le The column displays when the certificate has been issued Valide jusqu au The column displays the validity period of the certificate Nouveau Individual certificates ar...

Page 1227: ...Certificate Authorities COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1227 Deletes a certificate currently saved in the PBX after user confirmation at the prompt ...

Page 1228: ...er Proceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Certificats Fournisseur The column displays the issuer of the certificate Émis le The column displays when the certificate has been issued Valide jusqu au The column displays the validity period of the certificate ...

Page 1229: ...ot certificate Note The certificates keys this process requires can either be generated in the PBX or externally and then imported from a PC data storage device Note SIPS SRTP must also be enabled in the VoIP phones In addition the certificate must be verified For this you may need the Empreinte digitale Important SIPS SRTP must be switched off before you can change a certificate When switching it...

Page 1230: ... 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1230 Valide jusqu au The column displays the validity period of the certificate Supprimer Deletes a certificate currently saved in the PBX after user confirmation at the prompt ...

Page 1231: ...rtificate has been issued more information e g serial number and version Éditeur Publisher of the root certificate Importer Select a certificate that is stored on a data storage device and store it in the PBX Exporter The certificate stored in the PBX is downloaded from the device and saved to a PC data storage device Renouveler The certificate is renewed This affects among other things the period...

Page 1232: ...View COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1232 Deletes a certificate currently saved in the PBX after user confirmation at the prompt ...

Page 1233: ...Information V13 06 2019 1233 Courrier électronique Settings Outgoing Mail Server Management Logo Management Internationalisation Settings Internationalisation Settings Outgoing Mail ServerManagement LogoManagement InternationalisationSettings Internationalisation ...

Page 1234: ...Separately fpr outgoing mail servers Requirements Knowledge of the access data for the outgoing mail server Serveur de courrier sortant SMTP Select the outgoing mail server for which the settings are to be made Nouveau A new outgoing mail server is added Nom Freely selectable name This name is used to identify the outgoing mail server within the PBX and from connected system phones Adresse Enter t...

Page 1235: ...number of the outgoing mail server between 1 and 65535 You can obtain the port number from your e mail provider or read it up in the Internet Type d authentification aucune authentification Disables authentication User name Password AUTH PLAIN Enables authentication via password User name Password AUTH LOGIN Enables authentication via password MD5 challenge response AUTH CRAM MD5 Enables authentic...

Page 1236: ...tion of the outgoing mail server is secured using the SSL Secure Socket Layer protocol The data is transferred via https aucun chiffrement Switches encryption off Encryption SSL to STARTTLS Switches encryption on after STARTTLS Chiffrement SSL immédiat Switches encryption immediately on Serveur de courrier sortant par défaut The outgoing mail server first configured in the PBX is automatically swi...

Page 1237: ...rier sortant par défaut is shown in gray to indicate that the outgoing mail server is now being used as default To switch it off use as Serveur de courrier sortant par défaut must be switched on for another outgoing mail server Expéditeur Enter the address of the e mail sender It is used to display it to the recipient of the e mails Supprimer The outgoing mail server will be deleted ...

Page 1238: ...on Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Courrier électronique Gestion des logos Importer Note The logo must have the file format jpg and should have a size of 160 x 60 pixels width x height Note The file may have a size of 50 kB max The memory for all logos is limited to 500 kB Note If do not import your own logo the Auerswald FONtevo logo included in the scope of supply will be use...

Page 1239: ...splayed in the Configuration Manager and cannot be changed Note The file structure of the imported language file must be identical to the file structure of the default language file To this end export a language file to your PC and edit the text fields of the language file without changing the structure of the xml file Select and import a language file xml that is stored on a data storage device P...

Page 1240: ...nt Internationalisation COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1240 Configurer Opens the configuration of the user defined language file Supprimer Deletes the entries marked in the list ...

Page 1241: ... generate an e mail with information about a new message Mailbox Automatic clean up failed Text modules to generate an e mail regarding failure of automatic clean up Mailbox Storage space warning Text modules to generate an e mail when a specified storage capacity has been exceeded Mailbox Fax transmission successful Text modules to generate an e mail regarding successful fax transmission Mailbox ...

Page 1242: ...ed Information V13 06 2019 1242 Common General text modules Date and time Text modules with variables for date and time Date Day DD Month MM Year YYYY Time Hour 24 hour format hh24 Hour 12 hour format hh12 Minute mm Second ss am pm only English language template ampm ...

Page 1243: ...Messages système COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1243 Messages système Settings of the System Message Settings of the System Message ...

Page 1244: ...nced Information V13 06 2019 1244 Settings of the System Message Transfer of System E Mails Logs to be Sent as E Mails Events for System Logs Status Messages and Notes Transfer of System E MailsLogs to be Sent as E MailsEvents for System LogsStatus Messages and Notes ...

Page 1245: ...roceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Messages système Requirements configured outgoing mail server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Courrier électronique Serveur du courrier sortant configured DNS server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration IP ...

Page 1246: ...roceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Messages système Requirements configured outgoing mail server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Courrier électronique Serveur du courrier sortant configured DNS server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration IP ...

Page 1247: ...ed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Messages système Requirements configured outgoing mail server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Courrier électronique Serveur du courrier sortant configured DNS server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration IP ...

Page 1248: ...oceed as follows Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Messages système Requirements configured outgoing mail server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Courrier électronique Serveur du courrier sortant configured DNS server Using the Configuration Manager page Administration Configuration IP ...

Page 1249: ...Logs COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1249 Logs Settings of the Logging Settings of the Logging ...

Page 1250: ...Settings of the Logging COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1250 Settings of the Logging Logging Logging ...

Page 1251: ...tination source and time information of a telecommunication connection Configuration data of the PBX and connected phones as well as the corresponding PINs and passwords Address books of the PBX Before any recording all participants in the telecommunication connection must be informed that these contents will be recorded and must also be informed who will use the recorded data If you want to make ...

Page 1252: ... should only enable the Logging enabled function if you need to create logs for error analysis purposes Décodeur de canal D Install the D channel decoder PC programme and initiate logging see Recording the D Channel Protocol Serveur Syslog Enter the IP address and the port of the syslog server Configuring the syslog server A protocol can be recorded to log and display control and management inform...

Page 1253: ... Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1253 Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the syslog server Port serveur Syslog Enter the UDP port number of the syslog server Logging of the connection data will start as soon as you have saved your settings ...

Page 1254: ...Données de service COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1254 Données de service Exporting Service Data Exporting Service Data ...

Page 1255: ...otected components Configuration of the PBX Names of internal subscribers Passwords of PBX subscribers VoIP accounts and VoIP subscribers Address books of the PBX Connection data sets with destination source and time information of a telecommunication connection All PBX subscribers must be informed prior to storing the serice data that transmission of this content takes place and by whom the data ...

Page 1256: ...Mpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1256 Exporter le répertoire FTP The service data is exported together with the FTP directory Note If the FTP directory is too full exporting the service data may fail ...

Page 1257: ...mware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1257 Appendix Matériel Status Displays on the LEDs Buttons Printers and Data Storage Devices at the USB Host Status Displays on the LEDsButtonsPrinters and Data Storage Devices at the USB Host ...

Page 1258: ...ftware altern button is detected Flashes orange 0 5 0 5 s The Software altern button was pressed long enough Status LED Power LED PBX status after restart Lit in red Lit in red The boot partition is being tested Lit in orange Lit in red The kernel is being loaded from the partition Lit in green Lit in red The kernel is being initialised Lit in green Lit in orange The kernel modules are being loade...

Page 1259: ...ower LED remains constantly lit in red even after a restart an error has occured Please contact your dealer or the manufacturer directly Status LED Power LED PBX status during powering down Lit in green Flashes green The delayed powering down has been enabled and the PBX waits for the termination of the last call Lit in green Lit in red The PBX is powered down completely LAN LED COMpact 5000 Statu...

Page 1260: ...ork exists link and packets are being transmitted LAN Link LED COMpact 5000R Status of the Ethernet Interface Off No Ethernet connection to a computer network exists Lit in green An Ethernet connection to a computer network exists link LAN Activity LED COMpact 5000R Transfer Activities on the Ethernet Interface Off No transfer activity on the Ethernet interface Flashes orange Packets are being tra...

Page 1261: ...forming a Restart Immediately by Pressing a Button Restoring Firmware at the Touch of a Button Restore Factory Settings at the Touch of a Button InformationPerforming a Restart Immediately by Pressing a ButtonRestoring Firmware at the Touch of a ButtonRestore Factory Settings at the Touch of a Button ...

Page 1262: ...00 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1262 Information On the CPU module of the PBX the various buttons are located to e g reboot the PBX to restore the previous firmware or to set the PBX to factory settings ...

Page 1263: ... sure that the PBX is never left unattended while working with an open casing Close the casing after completing this work Only a qualified electrician may perform installation work within an open casing or service work using the buttons inside the casing If necessary commission a specialised dealer to perform this work Warning Power surges which can occur during electrical storms can cause life th...

Page 1264: ... V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1264 When the Power LED lights up in green again the restart is complete and the PBX is ready for operation Note If the Power LED remains continuously lit in red an error has occurred Please contact your dealer or the manufacturer directly ...

Page 1265: ...e that the PBX is never left unattended while working with an open casing Only a qualified electrician may perform installation work within an open casing or service work using the buttons inside the casing Warning Power surges which can occur during electrical storms can cause life threatening electric shocks and damage or destroy the PBX Do not open the PBX during an electrical storm Note The pr...

Page 1266: ... 2019 1266 2 Within the space of two seconds push the Software altern button on the CPU module and hold it The Status LED LED at the centre starts to quickly blink in orange After a few seconds the blinking of the Status LED will slow down 3 Let go of the Software altern button The Firmware is restored ...

Page 1267: ...and maintenance work it is necessary to open the PBX while it is in operation qualified electrician only Make sure that the PBX is never left unattended while working with an open casing Close the casing after completing this work Only a qualified electrician may perform installation work within an open casing or service work using the buttons inside the casing If necessary commission an authorise...

Page 1268: ...he Power LED starts to quickly blink in red After 5 seconds the LED Status starts to blink slowly 3 Release the Software default button Note If the Power LED remains continuously lit in red an error has occurred Please contact your dealer or the manufacturer directly Note If you release the Software default button too late the Power LED is no longer flashing restart the PBX without making any chan...

Page 1269: ... stick USB printer Important The data storage devices used require an EXT4 formatting For read access to USB memory sticks for example for automatic transfer of a configuration FAT or FAT32 formatting is also supported Note The connection of a USB hub is not supported Note You can use any printer with at least PCL4 emulation and USB port PCL6 or PCL5c emulation is downward compatible and includes ...

Page 1270: ...Glossary COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1270 Glossary Terminology Terminology ...

Page 1271: ...Terminology COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1271 Terminology A B C D E F G H I J L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z ABCDEFGHIJLMNOPQRSTUVWZ ...

Page 1272: ... 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1272 A Account Exchange Line APIPA Auerswald Remote Access Server Remote Extension AccountExchange LineAPIPA Auerswald Remote Access ServerRemote Extension ...

Page 1273: ...t COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1273 Account Authorisation to access a VoIP provider or a VoIP PBX Users must identify themselves by logging in with a username and a password ...

Page 1274: ...Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1274 Exchange Line General term for a connection that links the PBX to the public switched phone network The exchange line joins the provider s local exchange and the phone connection ...

Page 1275: ...1275 APIPA Automatic Private IP Addressing allows network interfaces to be configured automatically A device that supports APIPA allocates itself a random IP address from the range 169 254 1 0 to 169 254 254 255 or has a permanent IP address from the APIPA address range ...

Page 1276: ...000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1276 Auerswald Remote Access Server Auerswald Remote Access Server for remote configuration of the PBX via user interface and Internet access https remote access auerswald de remote access ...

Page 1277: ...V13 06 2019 1277 Remote Extension Internal subscriber e g home office outlying parts of the building branch offices connected to a central phone system via a public network e g the Internet The distance between the phone system and the outlying extension is not relevant ...

Page 1278: ...B COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1278 B B Channel B Channel ...

Page 1279: ...hannel COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1279 B Channel Bearer channel ISDN channel for the transportation of user data e g speech for direct communication between subscribers ...

Page 1280: ...C COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1280 C Dial around CD Client CLIP No Screening Codec Dial aroundCDClientCLIP No ScreeningCodec ...

Page 1281: ...V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1281 Dial around Service that allows a subscriber to make calls via another provider than the provider of the phone connection In this way the subscriber can use other often less expensive providers ...

Page 1282: ...ed Information V13 06 2019 1282 CD Call Deflection refers to call forwarding during the ringing period If Call Deflection has been activated the called subscriber can deflect the call on a case to case basis while the phone is still ringing ...

Page 1283: ...Client COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1283 Client Piece of computer hardware or software that accesses a service made available by a server ...

Page 1284: ...ls that allows the party called to see a customer defined phone number instead of the phone number assigned by the network provider In this context no screening means that the customer defined number is not checked by the public exchange against the assigned numbers It may contain any phone number you define e g a service phone number ...

Page 1285: ...e digitise analogue voice data for transmission and decode it again to convert it into back into voice There are various codecs that feature different voice data compression rates thereby require different band widths for data transmission The equality of VoIP calls is dependent on the codec used ...

Page 1286: ...D COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1286 D DDI DECT DHCP DiffServ D Channel DNS Domain DSL DynDNS DDIDECTDHCPDiffServD ChannelDNSDomainDSLDynDNS ...

Page 1287: ...nced Information V13 06 2019 1287 DDI Direct Dial In extension number for dialling directly to a specific subscriber on a phone system Example In the number 0 53 06 92 00 700 700 is the Direct Dial In number DDI for the Auerswald info line ...

Page 1288: ...1288 DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications previously Digital European Cordless Telephony a standard for digital cordless phones and data transmission also see GAP Auerswald DECT systems provide encrypted transmission between mobile handset and base station ...

Page 1289: ... Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1289 DHCP The IP address is temporarily allocated for a certain amount of time If the address is no longer required by the client the server has access to it again and can allocate it to another client ...

Page 1290: ...DiffServ Differentiated Services Flag flag evaluated by active network components such as routers or switches in networks in order to forward packets according to their priority This is necessary for example to give voice packets VoIP priority and to achieve better voice quality ...

Page 1291: ...D Channel COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1291 D Channel Delta channel ISDN channel for the transportation of signalling information between end device and public exchange ...

Page 1292: ...NS Domain Name Service needed to translate Internet addresses The name of a computer on the Internet for example Auerswald is assigned to the corresponding IP address This service is provided by DNS servers at the various Internet service providers or by upper domain servers ...

Page 1293: ...anced Information V13 06 2019 1293 Domain Globally unique name of a website consisting of third level domain e g the service name www second level domain e b auerswald and top level domain e g the country code uk The domain is part of the URL ...

Page 1294: ...e V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1294 DSL Digital Subscriber Line Internet access technology using a digital transmission standard that provides wide bandwidths for the transmission of data via telecommunication networks ...

Page 1295: ...V13 06 2019 1295 DynDNS DynDNS services make it possible to access an Internet connection despite a dynamic IP address To do this the service provider assigns the changing IP address of an Internet connection to a permanent domain name e g YourName DynDNS org ...

Page 1296: ...E COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1296 E Echo Cancellation End Device Ethernet Echo CancellationEnd DeviceEthernet ...

Page 1297: ...19 1297 Echo Cancellation Local echos and reverberation effects are compensated using echo cancellation For example an echo is generated on the receiver of a phone the voice of the caller emanates from the loud speakers and reaches the microphone where it is then transmitted back ...

Page 1298: ...End Device COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1298 End Device Device that can be operated on a communication network or on a PBX e g phone fax machine answering machine etc ...

Page 1299: ...Ethernet COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1299 Ethernet Network system with a speed of 10 100 1000 Mbit s that was developed by the companies INTEL DEC and Xerox ...

Page 1300: ...F COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1300 F Firewall Firmware Flash FirewallFirmwareFlash ...

Page 1301: ...rmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1301 Firewall Network security component that uses a set of security rules to protect a computer network or an individual computer against unauthorised access to or from the network ...

Page 1302: ...irmware COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1302 Firmware Operating software on the phone or PBX that is stored in the device itself The device cannot function without firmware ...

Page 1303: ... COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1303 Flash Storage device e g a USB memory stick for the non volatile storage of data within a minimum of space without permanent power supply ...

Page 1304: ...G COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1304 G GAP Gateway GAPGateway ...

Page 1305: ...e V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1305 GAP Generic Access Profile transmission protocol for cordless phones Describes the basic functions for the communciation of DECT devices from different manufacturers among themselves ...

Page 1306: ...nced Information V13 06 2019 1306 Gateway PC or router used as an intermediary between two networks The Internet service provider is the gateway for direct Internet dial up connections If you use a router this is the gateway in a local network ...

Page 1307: ...H COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1307 H Host HTTP Proxy HTTPS Hyperlink HostHTTP ProxyHTTPSHyperlink ...

Page 1308: ...0 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1308 Host Component of a data processing system that manages larger application programs and data volumes and makes them available to lower order servers and clients ...

Page 1309: ...HTTP Proxy COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1309 HTTP Proxy Proxy for the HTTP protocol over which Internet sites are called or files downloaded ...

Page 1310: ...PS COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1310 HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure communication protocol for tap proof data transfer with encryption within the World Wide Web ...

Page 1311: ...erlink COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1311 Hyperlink Electronic cross reference e g inside an Internet document to a defined location within the same or a different document ...

Page 1312: ...I COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1312 I IAD IP Address IPv4 Address IPv6 Address ISDN PD IADIP AddressIPv4 AddressIPv6 AddressISDNPD ...

Page 1313: ...Mpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1313 IAD The IAD Integrated Access Device is a device for realising an Internet connection Usually this device is provided by the Internet provider ...

Page 1314: ...Mpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1314 IP Address Unique numerical address within a TCP IP network that is assigned to one device and ensures that data packages reach the correct recipient ...

Page 1315: ...192 168 0 x to 192 168 255 x for networks with up to 254 PCs These addresses have no validity on the Internet this means that data packets with this sender type or recipient address cannot be transported on the Internet However they can be used in local networks without restriction The advantage of this is that if data from a local network configured in this way comes in contact with the Internet ...

Page 1316: ...se eight blocks with four digits or characters each that are separated by a colon for example 3001 00FF ABC0 0EAC 0001 0000 0000 000F or abbreviated 3001 FF ABC0 EAC 1 F Thanks to the greater length of IPv6 addresses IPv6 offers a greater number of available IP addresses than version 4 of the Internet protocol IPv4 ...

Page 1317: ...ormation V13 06 2019 1317 ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network digital network that combines the different communication services e g telephony telefax groups 2 and 3 data transmission etc Unlike analogue networks ISDN uses digital transmission ...

Page 1318: ...0 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1318 PD Pulse dialling an older dialling method that transmits the dialled number to the exchange by interrupting the current in the A wire of the phone connection ...

Page 1319: ...J COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1319 J Jitter Buffer Jitter Buffer ...

Page 1320: ...A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1320 Jitter Buffer Buffers RTP packages to compensate irregular transfer rates of the Internet A high jitter buffer reduces short interruptions during the call In return the delay of the RTP packages increases ...

Page 1321: ...L COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1321 L LAN LDAP LED LANLDAPLED ...

Page 1322: ...LAN COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1322 LAN Local Area Network connects computers over company or home networks ...

Page 1323: ... COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1323 LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol enables you to query the data in a directory service a hierarchical database over the network ...

Page 1324: ...LED COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1324 LED Light emitting diode electronic device similar to a lamp and used for displays also multi coloured ...

Page 1325: ...M COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1325 M MAC Address PTMP DTMF MSN MAC AddressPTMPDTMFMSN ...

Page 1326: ...le network card used in the whole world This means that the network card is unique and can be controlled and detected detected by the network without any problems The IP addresses on the TCP IP network are always mapped to the respective MAC address MAC addresses are represented in a byte by byte format with the individual bytes being separated by colons or hyphens e g 00 09 52 04 4B 13 ...

Page 1327: ...Mpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1327 PTMP Point to Multipoint ISDN connection with 3 to 10 independent phone numbers MSNs They can be assigned to one or more devices including PBXs ...

Page 1328: ...pact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1328 DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency dialling dialling method that transmits the dialled number to the exchange as two superimposed sinusoidal signals ...

Page 1329: ... R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1329 MSN Multiple Subscriber Numbers multiple phone numbers where an ISDN PTMP connection can be reached The MSN is the part of the phone number without a local prefix ...

Page 1330: ...N COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1330 N NAT Extension Network NTP NATExtensionNetworkNTP ...

Page 1331: ...V13 06 2019 1331 NAT Network Address Translation permits the mapping of a specific IP address used within a network to another IP address used by another network This function is e g performed by a router which connects a local area network to the Internet ...

Page 1332: ...Extension COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1332 Extension Internal connections of a PBX together with the devices e g phones and telefaxes connected to them ...

Page 1333: ...t 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1333 Network System of more than one computer and other communication devices that enable multiple users to access common resources such as files printers etc ...

Page 1334: ...act 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1334 NTP If a local NTP server is available in a local network it can be selected or a public NTP server from a public list on the Internet can be used ...

Page 1335: ...O COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1335 O Outbound Proxy Outbound Proxy ...

Page 1336: ...bound Proxy COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1336 Outbound Proxy Intermediate server that processes all VoIP requests and connections going to the provider except registration ...

Page 1337: ...P COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1337 P PIN PoE Port Proxy Server PINPoEPortProxy Server ...

Page 1338: ...PIN COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1338 PIN Personal Identification Number multi digit secret code that has to be entered to get access to services or authorisations ...

Page 1339: ...PoE COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1339 PoE PoE is described in the IEEE 802 3af standard ...

Page 1340: ...rovide multiple services for other PCs Ports are used to differentiate these connections from parallel connections Due to a common agreement PCs usually provide their services on ports 1 to 1023 Outgoing connections are usually established starting at port 1024 Most services that use the standard port numbers for example web browsers use port 80 ...

Page 1341: ...face to the Internet or between two networks A proxy server receives queries from a computer in an Intranet for example It then connects to the Internet on behalf of the computer to forward the queries and return the if necessary filtered responses To achieve this the HTTP proxy uses the Internet s HTTP protocol ...

Page 1342: ...Q COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1342 Q QoS QR Code QoSQR Code ...

Page 1343: ...act 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1343 QoS Quality of service service of the router or switch that provides constantly high speech quality by prioritising speech data RTP data packages ...

Page 1344: ...QR Code COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1344 QR Code Quick Reponse Code two dimensional code for binary representation of data in a matrix of black and white squares ...

Page 1345: ...R COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1345 R Registrar Router Routing RSS Feed RegistrarRouterRoutingRSS Feed ...

Page 1346: ...Registrar COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1346 Registrar A registrar domain name registar is an organisation or a company that registers Internet domains ...

Page 1347: ...ants to send a data packet this packet must travel over a router The router uses the IP address to detect the network it must send the data to In addition to connecting to networks routers can also execute certain control functions such as maintaining a simple firewall In a home network routers are usually used to connect the local network to the Internet and to enable simultaneous Internet access...

Page 1348: ...ct 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1348 Routing Identification of paths for the flow of data within computer networks Routing determines the complete path of a set of data through the network ...

Page 1349: ...ormation V13 06 2019 1349 RSS Feed RSS Really Simple Syndication is an XML based file format A subscribed RSS feed automatically delivers new messages which can then be read in special newsreaders or in current browsers e g Mozilla Firefox Google Chrome ...

Page 1350: ...HC SD XC Card Server SIP SIP DDI SIP Trunking SIP Port SMTP Soft Call Structured Cabling STUN Subnet mask Switch Syslog Server System Phone SS 0 Basic Access SS 0 Port SS 2M Primary Rate Multiplex Access SD SDHC SD XC CardServerSIPSIP DDI SIP Trunking SIP PortSMTPSoft CallStructured CablingSTUNSubnet maskSwitchSyslog ServerSystem Phone ...

Page 1351: ...with a maximum of two speech channels and one data channel D channel A difference is made between external and internal S0 An external S0 port can be used as PTP or PTMP connection COMfortel system phones other ISDN devices and ISDN PC cards are connected to the internal S0 port The internal bus acts as PTMP connection ...

Page 1352: ...S0 Port COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1352 S0 Port ISDN port with two payload channels and a data channel Two simultaneous connections are possible on an S0 port ...

Page 1353: ...13 06 2019 1353 S2M Primary Rate Multiplex Access A S2M primary rate multiplex access provides the PBX with up to 30 speech channels B channels and one data channel D channel It is designed as a PTP connection and can be operated in combination with ISDN basic access connections S0 ports ...

Page 1354: ...insertion into the card slot A lateral device for write protection sliding switch protects them from accidental deletion of data SD cards can store up to 2 GB SD 1 1 standard whereas SDHC cards can store up to 32 GB SD 2 0 standard SC XC cards can store from 32 GB to theoretically 2 048 GB SD 3 0 standard Information on recommended memory cards can be found in the Internet see Auerswald Auerswald ...

Page 1355: ...e V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1355 Server Computer or a software that fulfils different tasks as part of the network It provides for example other users clients in this network with certain information data and services ...

Page 1356: ...019 1356 SIP Session Initiation Protocol network protocol which provides establishing a communication session between two or more subscribers Via SIP only communication conditions are arranged Other protocols such as RTP are responsible for actual data transmission ...

Page 1357: ... 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1357 SIP DDI SIP Trunking Some VoIP providers also support a VoIP PTP connection with a Direct Dial In option The provider allocates a PBX base number with additional Direct Dial In numbers DDI numbers e g 9200 0 ...

Page 1358: ...SIP Port COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1358 SIP Port Port of the local system used as the communication port for the SIP transfer ...

Page 1359: ...mails between the PBX and external mail servers The PBX needs an external SMTP server outgoing mail server to send system e mails or forward voice mail messages and fax messages Under Administration Courrier électronique Serveur du courrier sortantyou can enter different outgoing mail servers If no outgoing mail server has been entered no e mails can be sent ...

Page 1360: ... R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1360 Soft Call With the soft call function a user can use the Configuration Manager of the PBX to dial an external number directly from the phone book or the call data list ...

Page 1361: ...tion V13 06 2019 1361 Structured Cabling Structured cabling provides a uniform cable infrastructure for different services such as speech analogue ISDN and data IP based networks Structured cabling is subdivided into primary secondary and tertiary structured cabling ...

Page 1362: ...2019 1362 STUN Simple Transversal of UDP over NATs used to determine the public IP address of an Internet connection To do this a STUN request is sent to a STUN server which then shares its own IP address allocated by the VoIP provider with the Internet connection ...

Page 1363: ...ask COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1363 Subnet mask The value of the subnet mask as with IP addresses is often given in decimal form for example 255 255 255 0 for IPv4 addresses ...

Page 1364: ...act 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1364 Switch Active network distributor that distributes data packages to a destination defined by an IP address among the different segments of a network ...

Page 1365: ...t 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1365 Syslog Server Records protocols with control and management information about the PBX This information helps to identify errors and where possible their causes ...

Page 1366: ... V13 06 2019 1366 System Phone Thanks to their integration into the system system telefphones simplify the operation of the entire system and additionally offer numerous possibilities to use PBX functions and signalise their status visually and in part accustically ...

Page 1367: ...T COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1367 T TAPI TCP Template PTP T Net Functions Driver TAPITCPTemplatePTPT Net FunctionsDriver ...

Page 1368: ...formation V13 06 2019 1368 TAPI Phone Application Programming Interface name of a standardised software interface for computer assisted telephony CTI TAPI ensures that software and hardware from various manufacturers are compatible with each other ...

Page 1369: ... and reliably sends these individual data packets in the correct sequence to the recipient address In this process every data packet sent must be resent until it has been confirmed as arrived In order to make sure this happens a large amount of information is sent along with the actual payload data Most Internet services are implemented with TCP e g HTTP WWW SMTP POPS e mail etc ...

Page 1370: ...mplate COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1370 Template File here provisioning file with default provisioning data that can be replaced by subscriberspecific provisioning data ...

Page 1371: ...vanced Information V13 06 2019 1371 PTP Point to Point ISDN connection with Direct Dial In option A provider allocates a PBX base number with additional Direct Dial In numbers DDIs e g 9200 0 PBXs are usually operated on a PTP connection ...

Page 1372: ...3 06 2019 1372 T Net Functions Functions available on the analogue T Net in Germany There are analogue comfort phones with pre defined function keys or menus for T Net functions such as callback on busy call forwarding toggling between conversations or conference calling ...

Page 1373: ...7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1373 Driver Program or software module that controls the interaction between an operating system or program and the interfaces to connected devices keyboard printer monitor etc or virtual devices ...

Page 1374: ...U COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1374 U UDP UP0 UPnP URL UDP UU P0 UPnPURL ...

Page 1375: ...ent on the application and is therefore not always guaranteed UDP itself does not verify whether data has been transmitted successfully When a UDP packet is sent the sender cannot assume that the packet will indeed arrive at the recipient This particular protocol needs only a small amount of additional information and results in a better data throughput rate in a well functioning network e g on a ...

Page 1376: ...376 UP0 The UP0 interface is used as PTMP connection to link up digital end devices via a single twin wire System phones of the COMfortel series are directly connected to the internal UP0 port other ISDN devices can be connected to the UP0 port the via a UP0 S0 adapter ...

Page 1377: ...P Universal Plug and Play is a standard for networking various devices on home networks It ensures that computers televisions multimedia equipment and household appliances can be automatically detected by each other without the user having to spend a lot of time configuring settings ...

Page 1378: ...dvanced Information V13 06 2019 1378 URL Uniform Source Locator complete address of a resource e g a website consisting of a scheme e g http and a scheme specific part e g domain www auerswald de and path en products pbx home office html ...

Page 1379: ...V COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1379 V Public Exchange VoIP Account VoIP Provider Voucher VPN Public ExchangeVoIP AccountVoIP ProviderVoucherVPN ...

Page 1380: ...Public Exchange COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1380 Public Exchange Node point on the public telecommunication network ...

Page 1381: ...IP calls For this purpose you need to register your name and address with a provider via their web site Finally one or more phone numbers accessible from the public switched network and the Internet as well as an account with a user name and password are allocated Most of the time it only takes a few minutes to configure the registered connection which can then be used almost immediately ...

Page 1382: ...VoIP Provider COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1382 VoIP Provider Internet service provider offering internet telephony VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol ...

Page 1383: ... 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1383 Voucher Voucher for a function release for a specific device type e g automatic receptions for COMpact 4000 This is not tied to an individual serial number ...

Page 1384: ...ation V13 06 2019 1384 VPN Virtual Private Network connects remote or neighbouring networks LAN to the internal network using a VPN tunnel The tunnel functions basically as a channel in which embedded data is transported from one network to the other ...

Page 1385: ...W COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1385 W WAN WAN ...

Page 1386: ...WAN COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1386 WAN Wide Area Network a public network e g the Internet ...

Page 1387: ...Z COMpact 5000 R Firmware V7 4A Advanced Information V13 06 2019 1387 Z Certificate Certificate ...

Page 1388: ...dentify the owner of the certificate Its authenticity can be verified by cryptographic procedures The certificate thus confirms the identity of a person or a company by means of an asymmetric key thus ensuring that the person or company really is the person company it claims to be Certificates are issued by an officicial institution the Certification Authority CA ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for COMpact 5000R

Reviews:

Related manuals for COMpact 5000R

Brands by name

Popular brands

Auerswald COMpact 5000R, Advanced Information

Search results

Summary of Contents for COMpact 5000R

Reviews:

Related manuals for COMpact 5000R

Brands by name

Popular brands